IBM TS4300 Tape Library

Machine Type 3555

User's Guide

IBM

SC27-4629-03
Important
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in “Notices” on page 197. To ensure
you have the latest publications, visit the web at [Link]

This edition applies to the IBM TS4300 Tape Library User's Guide, SC27-4629-03, and to the subsequent
releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2017, 2018.

US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule
Contract with IBM Corp.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 iii

iv IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Read this first
This product might not be certified in your country for connection by any means whatsoever to
interfaces of public telecommunications networks. Further certification might be required by law
before any such connection is made. Contact IBM® for information.

Regulatory information
v The IBM TS4300 library must be installed in a restricted area.
v Only personnel with technical and product safety training should have access to the library.
v To comply with the regulations and standards, the library must be properly installed in an office or
industrial environment with shielded cables and adequate grounding of SAS interface and input
power.
Table 1. Regulatory marks
The CE mark is a mandatory conformity mark on many products that are
placed on the single market in the European Economic Area (EEA). The
CE marking certifies that a product meets EU consumer safety, health, or
environmental requirements.

CSA C22-2 No.60950-1 - Electrical safety - UL 60950-1 68475

Minimum firmware levels for common library features

Table 2. Minimum firmware levels for common library features
Feature Minimum Firmware Levels Required
LTO8 (HH/FH) Tape Drives Library Firmware must be at [Link]-A00 or greater to
support the LTO8 tape drives. Ensure that any host
applications and device drivers are at the minimum level
that is required to support LTO8 tape drives.
LTO6 (HH/FH) and LTO7 (HH/FH) Tape Drives Library Firmware must be at [Link]-A00 or greater to
support the LTO6 and LTO7 tape drives. Ensure that any
host applications and device drivers are at the minimum
level that is required to support LTO6 and LTO7 tape
drives.
Library-Managed Encryption Library Firmware must be at [Link]-A00 or greater to
support the Library-Managed Encryption feature. Ensure
that any key manager applications are at the minimum
level that is required to support the 3U library.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 v

 Table 2. Minimum firmware levels for common library features (continued)
Feature Minimum Firmware Levels Required
Path Failover (Control Path and Data Path) Library Firmware must be at [Link]-A00 or greater to
support the Path Failover feature. Ensure that any IBM
device drivers are at the minimum level that is required
to support the 3U library.
Remote Logging (rsyslog) Library Firmware must be at [Link]-A00 or greater to
support the Remote Logging feature. Ensure that any
IBM device drivers are at the minimum level that is
required to support the 3U library.
LTO M8 media Library Firmware must be at [Link]-B00 or greater to
support the M8 media feature. Drive firmware must be
at HB82 or greater to support the M8 media feature.
Ensure that any IBM device drivers are at the minimum
level that is required to support the 3U library.
| Sequential Mode Library Firmware must be at [Link]-A00 or greater to
| support Sequential Mode. Ensure that any host
| applications are at the minimum level that is required to
| support the 3U library in this mode.

Accessing online technical support

It is the customer's responsibility to set up this tape drive or library and to ensure that the drive and
library have the latest firmware (unless a service contract is purchased).

For online Technical Support, visit [Link]

For the latest firmware and diagnostic procedures, visit [Link]

Contacting IBM technical support

In the US: Call 1-800-IBM_SERV (1-800-426-7378).

Note: Before calling, complete all the steps in “Contacting IBM technical support” on page 78.

All other Countries/Regions: Visit [Link]

To open a Service Request online: Under Support & downloads, click Open a service request.

Registering for My Notification

My Notification registration provides email notification when new firmware levels are updated and
available for download and installation. To register for My Notification:
1. Visit the web at [Link]
2. Click My Notifications.

Note: Library firmware and tape drive firmware are verified and released together. When you are
updating to the latest firmware, verify that all installed components such as tape drives and library
firmware are at the latest levels noted on the Support website. Mixing different levels of library and tape
drive firmware is not supported and might cause unpredictable results.

vi IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Sending us your comments
Your feedback is important in helping IBM provide accurate and useful information. If you have
comments or suggestions for improving this publication, send your comments by:
v Emailing IBM:
– Internet or IBMLink from US: starpubs@[Link]
– IBMLink from Canada: STARPUBS at TORIBM
Include the following information in your email:
– Exact publication title
– Form number (for example, GA32–1234–02) or part number (on the back cover of the publication)
– Page, table, or illustration numbers that you are commenting on
– A detailed description of any information that should be changed

Read this first vii

viii IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
 Summary of changes
| Information added to the SC27-4629-03 editions.
| v Information on configuring Sequential Mode for Logical Libraries

Information added to the SC27-4629-02 edition.

v Support for LTO8 Type M Cartridge (M8)
– Description and support for M8 media
- 9 TB data capacity
- 22.5 TB data capacity with 2.5:1 compression

Information added to the SC27-4629-01 edition.

v Support for LTO8
– Specifications for Ultrium 8 full-height and half-height drives
– Full support of Ultrium 8 media
- 12 TB data capacity
- 30 TB data capacity with 2.5:1 compression
v Support for licensed features
– Library-Managed Encryption
– Path Failover

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 ix

x IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
 Contents
Important . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Library Layout and Location requirements . . . . 25
Read this first . . . . . . . . . . . . v Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Minimum firmware levels for common library Network requirements. . . . . . . . . . . 32
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Host requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Accessing online technical support . . . . . . . vi Optional features . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Contacting IBM technical support . . . . . . . vi
Registering for My Notification . . . . . . . . vi Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Sending us your comments . . . . . . . . . vii Unpacking the Base Module and Expansion
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Summary of changes . . . . . . . . . ix Identifying Library Module components . . . . . 40
Preparing top and bottom modules . . . . . . 40
Installing modules in a rack . . . . . . . . . 43
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Installing a tabletop module . . . . . . . . . 47
Aligning and connecting modules . . . . . . . 47
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv Validating tape drive installation . . . . . . . 50
Connecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Safety and environmental notices . . xvii Powering on the library . . . . . . . . . . 52
Danger and Caution notices . . . . . . . . xvii The Initial Setup process . . . . . . . . . . 52
Possible safety hazards . . . . . . . . . . xx Initial configuration and customization . . . . . 53
Class I laser product . . . . . . . . . . . xx Labeling and loading tape cartridges . . . . . . 54
Acclimation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi Verifying the installation . . . . . . . . . . 55
Performing the safety inspection procedure . . . xxi Advanced library configuration. . . . . . . . 56
Rack safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Power Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv Library partitioning . . . . . . . . . . 57
Verifying the host connection . . . . . . . . 58
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Managing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 The Management GUI . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 The Operator Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Structure and supported library configurations . . .2 Locating Management functions . . . . . . . 63
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Methods of cleaning drives . . . . . . . . 69
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Accessing cartridges . . . . . . . . . . 70
Magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Configuring Library Managed Encryption (KMIP) 71
Power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Bar code reader . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . 73
User interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Finding event information . . . . . . . . . 73
Supported tape drives . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Identifying a failed component . . . . . . . . 73
Control path drives . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Running library tests . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Mixed drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . 73
Drive sled back panels. . . . . . . . . . 13 Pre-call checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Physical and logical addresses of drives . . . . 15 Contacting IBM technical support . . . . . . . 78
Supported tape cartridges . . . . . . . . . 16 Diagnostic information . . . . . . . . . . 79
Library functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 IBM Tape Diagnostic tool (ITDT) . . . . . . 79
| Random and Sequential Logical Library modes 17 Event codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Main error events . . . . . . . . . . 81
Library sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Warning error events . . . . . . . . . 88
Control path failover, Data path failover, and Configuration Change events . . . . . . 96
load balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Informational events . . . . . . . . . 97
Alerts and logging . . . . . . . . . . . 20 TapeAlert flags . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Host connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 TapeAlert flags supported by the library. . . 99
Network connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 22 TapeAlert flags supported by the drive . . . 100
Sense data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 xi

 Drive Error Codes: Single-character display Disposing of tape cartridges . . . . . . . . 166
(SCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Ordering media supplies . . . . . . . . . 166
SCD dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Ordering bar code labels . . . . . . . . 168
Status light . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Appendix C. Replacement parts . . . 169
Upgrading and servicing . . . . . . 109
Internal view of library . . . . . . . . . . 109 Appendix D. Manual cartridge removal
Adding, removing, or replacing a tape drive . . . 110 procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding or replacing a Base or Expansion Module 113
Recommended tools . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding, removing, or replacing a power supply 119
Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Replacing a Base or Expansion controller card . . 122
Beginning procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Installing, removing, or replacing an accessor and
Removing the drive brick from the sled . . . 172
spooling mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Removing the drive cover . . . . . . . . 173
Returning the accessor to the Base Module . . 132
Full height drive: Tape spooled off supply reel . . 175
Removing or replacing a spooling mechanism . . 134
Half height drive: Tape spooled off supply reel 176
Removing or replacing a magazine . . . . . . 138
Full height drive: Tape pulled from or broken near
Moving the library modules . . . . . . . . 140
leader pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Half height drive: Tape pulled from or broken
Appendix A. Library Configuration near leader pin . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Full height drive: Tape broken in mid-tape . . . 181
Library information . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Half height drive: Tape broken in mid-tape . . 182
Module and drive information . . . . . . . 145 Full height drive: Tape tangled along tape path . . 183
Logical Library information . . . . . . . . 146 Half height drive: Tape tangled along tape path 186
Users account information . . . . . . . . . 147 Full height drive: No apparent failure or damage
to tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Appendix B. LTO media . . . . . . . 149 Half height drive: No apparent failure or
Data cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 damage to tape . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Cartridge Read/Write compatibility . . . . . 150 Ending procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
LTO Type M Cartridge (M8) . . . . . . . 151
Capacity scaling . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Appendix E. Accessibility . . . . . . 195
WORM (Write Once, Read Many) cartridges . . . 152
WORM media . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Data security on WORM media . . . . . . 152 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
WORM media errors . . . . . . . . . . 152 Electromagnetic compatibility notices . . . . . 199
WORM requirements . . . . . . . . . . 152 Canada Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Cleaning cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . 153 European Community and Morocco Notice . . 200
Cartridge memory chip (LTO-CM) . . . . . . 153 Germany Notice . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Labeling tape cartridges . . . . . . . . . . 153 Japan Voluntary Control Council for Interference
Guidelines for bar code labels . . . . . . . 155 (VCCI) Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Write-Protect switch . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Japan Electronics and Information Technology
Handling the cartridges . . . . . . . . . . 156 Industries Association (JEITA) Notice . . . . 201
Providing training . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Korea Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Ensuring proper packaging . . . . . . . . 156 People's Republic of China Notice . . . . . 202
Proper acclimation and environmental Taiwan Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Russia Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Completing a thorough inspection . . . . . 158 United States Federal Communications
Handling the cartridge carefully . . . . . . 159 Commission (FCC) Notice . . . . . . . . 203
Examples of cartridge problems . . . . . . 159
Repositioning or reattaching a leader pin . . . . 160
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Repositioning a leader pin . . . . . . . . 160
Reattaching a leader pin . . . . . . . . . 161
Environmental and shipping specifications for tape Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

xii IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figures
1. Two module tape library . . . . . . . . 1 54. Front panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . 63
2. Base Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 55. Internal view of the library . . . . . . . 109
3. Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . 3 56. Drive bay covers . . . . . . . . . . 111
4. Base Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 57. Alignment rails . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5. 2 module library . . . . . . . . . . . 3 58. Installing a tape drive . . . . . . . . . 112
6. 3 module library . . . . . . . . . . . 3 59. Unlocking the drive . . . . . . . . . 112
7. 4 module library . . . . . . . . . . . 4 60. Interconnect cables . . . . . . . . . . 115
8. 5 module library . . . . . . . . . . . 4 61. Unlocking or disengaging the alignment lever 116
9. 6 Module library . . . . . . . . . . . 5 62. Loosening the thumbscrews. . . . . . . 117
10. 7 module library . . . . . . . . . . . 6 63. Sliding the module out of the rack . . . . 117
11. Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 64. Placement of the RID tag (Base Module
12. Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 shown). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
13. Physical numbering of modules . . . . . . 9 65. Power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . 120
14. Left magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 66. Sliding in the new power supply . . . . . 121
15. Right magazine . . . . . . . . . . . 10 67. Controller card components. . . . . . . 123
16. Power supply rear panel LEDs . . . . . . 11 68. Installing a Controller card . . . . . . . 124
17. Mixed drives in a logical library . . . . . 13 69. Magazine release levers . . . . . . . . 126
18. Drive sled indicators . . . . . . . . . 13 70. Unlocking the robot . . . . . . . . . 127
19. Half-height SAS dual port. . . . . . . . 14 71. Finger holes . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
20. Half-height FC single port . . . . . . . 14 72. Unlocking the spooling cable and placing it in
21. Full-height FC dual port . . . . . . . . 15 its cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
22. Physical numbering of drives . . . . . . 16 73. Spooling cable in park position . . . . . 129
23. Types of receptacles . . . . . . . . . . 32 74. Pins are aligned horizontally . . . . . . 130
24. Removing the module from the box . . . . 36 75. Installing the spooling cable . . . . . . 131
25. The module after removal from the box 37 76. Inserting the screwdriver to manually operate
26. Unlatching the top of the module . . . . . 38 the accessor . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
27. Removing the top of the module . . . . . 38 77. Left magazine opening . . . . . . . . 134
28. The module is opened to show the foam 78. Unlocking the spooling mechanism . . . . 135
packing.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 79. Unlocked spooling mechanism - enlarged
29. The foam packing is removed, and the internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
components are shown - Base Module. . . . 39 80. Locked spooling mechanism - enlarged view 137
30. Lowering the front of the top cover . . . . 41 81. Removing the spooling mechanism . . . . 138
31. Unlocking the spring loaded lock . . . . . 42 82. Manually releasing the right magazine 139
32. Removing the cover. . . . . . . . . . 42 83. Manually releasing the left magazine 139
33. Lifting the cover and locking it . . . . . . 43 84. The IBM LTO data cartridge . . . . . . 149
34. Universal rack connector . . . . . . . . 44 85. LTO Data and WORM tape cartridges 152
35. Incorrect connector locations . . . . . . . 44 86. Sample bar code label on the LTO8 Tape
36. Correct connector locations . . . . . . . 45 Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
37. Mounting the rails to the connectors . . . . 45 87. Setting the write-protect switch . . . . . 156
38. Side rails installed . . . . . . . . . . 46 88. Tape cartridges in a Turtlecase . . . . . . 157
39. Sliding the library into the rack . . . . . . 46 89. Double-boxing tape cartridges for shipping 157
40. Library in the rack . . . . . . . . . . 47 90. Checking for gaps in the seams of a cartridge 159
41. Alignment lever lock . . . . . . . . . 48 91. Leader pin in the incorrect and correct
42. Alignment lever locked or engaged to lower positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 92. Placing the dislodged leader pin into the
43. Alignment lever unlocked or disengaged 49 correct position . . . . . . . . . . . 161
44. Two modules in rack, seen from the rear 49 93. Rewinding the tape into the cartridge 161
45. Connected modules . . . . . . . . . . 50 94. Leader Pin Reattachment Kit . . . . . . 162
46. Full-height FC dual port . . . . . . . . 50 95. Attaching the leader pin attach tool to the
47. Half-height FC single port . . . . . . . 51 cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
48. Half-height SAS dual port. . . . . . . . 51 96. Winding the tape out of the cartridge 163
49. IP address selection . . . . . . . . . . 53 97. Removing the C-clip from the leader pin 164
50. Open I/O station seen from the left . . . . 54 98. Attaching the leader pin to the tape . . . . 165
51. Magazine pulled out . . . . . . . . . 55 99. Connection screws and plastic cover . . . . 172
52. Management GUI main screen . . . . . . 60 100. The drive brick, showing the cables to be
53. Operator Panel main screen . . . . . . . 62 unplugged. . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 xiii

101. Removing the cover from the full height 111. The hex wrench rewinds tape into cartridge 184
drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 112. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear
102. Removing the cover from the half height train. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 113. Leader Block Assembly (LBA) . . . . . . 186
103. The hex wrench rewinds tape into cartridge 176 114. Rewinding tape into cartridge . . . . . . 187
104. Rewinding tape into cartridge . . . . . . 177 115. The hex wrench rewinds tape into cartridge 188
105. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear 116. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear
train. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 train. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
106. Leader Block Assembly (LBA) . . . . . . 179 117. Leader Block Assembly (LBA) . . . . . . 190
107. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear 118. Rewinding tape into cartridge . . . . . . 191
train. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 119. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear
108. Leader Block Assembly (LBA) . . . . . . 181 train. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
109. The hex wrench rewinds tape into cartridge 182 120. Leader Block Assembly (LBA) . . . . . . 192
110. Rewinding tape into cartridge . . . . . . 183

xiv IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Tables
1. Regulatory marks . . . . . . . . . . . v 30. Operator Panel menu tree . . . . . . . . 62
2. Minimum firmware levels for common library 31. Front panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . 63
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v 32. Locating Management functions . . . . . 63
3. Module designations . . . . . . . . . . 1 33. Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4. Minimum and maximum storage configurations 2 34. Magazine state . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5. Library configurations . . . . . . . . . 3 35. Resolving errors . . . . . . . . . . . 74
6. Front panel descriptions. . . . . . . . . 7 36. Main error events . . . . . . . . . . 81
7. Rear panel descriptions . . . . . . . . . 8 37. Warning events . . . . . . . . . . . 88
8. Physical numbering of storage slots - bottom 38. Configuration Change events . . . . . . 96
module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 39. Informational Events . . . . . . . . . 97
9. Power supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . 11 40. Error codes on the single-character display 105
10. Supported tape drives . . . . . . . . . 12 41. Meaning of Status light and single-character
11. Drive sled indicators . . . . . . . . . 14 display (SCD) . . . . . . . . . . . 106
12. Half-height SAS dual port. . . . . . . . 14 42. Internal view description . . . . . . . 109
13. Half-height FC single port . . . . . . . 14 43. Pinch hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
14. Full-height FC dual port . . . . . . . . 15 44. Power supply components . . . . . . . 120
15. Differences between CPF and DPF . . . . . 19 45. Controller card components. . . . . . . 123
16. Location requirements . . . . . . . . . 25 46. Cartridge data capacity and recording formats 149
17. Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . 26 47. Nominal cartridge life: Load/unload cycles 150
18. Electrical specifications. . . . . . . . . 26 48. Data cartridge compatibility with LTO tape
19. Environmental specifications . . . . . . . 26 drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
20. Gas and particulate exposure . . . . . . 27 49. LTO Cartridge Types . . . . . . . . . 151
21. Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 50. Cartridges and VOLSERs compatible with the
22. Optional features. . . . . . . . . . . 34 LTO Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . 154
23. Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . 35 51. Location of the write-protect switch . . . . 156
24. Full-height FC dual port . . . . . . . . 51 52. Environment for operating, storing, and
25. Half-height FC single port . . . . . . . 51 shipping the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge . . 166
26. Half-height SAS dual port. . . . . . . . 52 53. Media supplies . . . . . . . . . . . 166
27. Main screen elements . . . . . . . . . 60 54. Authorized suppliers of custom bar code
28. Navigation Dock . . . . . . . . . . . 61 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
29. Status icons . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 55. Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . 169

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 xv

xvi IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Safety and environmental notices
When this product is used, observe the danger, caution, and attention notices that are contained in this
guide. The notices are accompanied by symbols that represent the severity of the safety condition.

Most danger or caution notices contain a reference number (Dxxxx or Cxxxx). Use the reference number
to check the translation in the IBM Systems Safety Information (G229-9054) publication included in your
ship group.

The sections that follow define each type of safety notice and give examples.

Danger and Caution notices

Danger notices

A danger notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or extremely hazardous to people. A
lightning bolt symbol always accompanies a danger notice to represent a dangerous electrical condition.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 xvii

 To prevent a possible shock from touching two surfaces with different
protective ground (earth), use one hand, when possible, to connect or
disconnect signal cables. (D001)
Overloading a branch circuit is potentially a fire hazard and a shock hazard
under certain conditions. To avoid these hazards, ensure that your system
electrical requirements do not exceed branch circuit protection requirements.
Refer to the information that is provided with your device or the power
rating label for electrical specifications. (D002)
If the receptacle has a metal shell, do not touch the shell until you have
completed the voltage and grounding checks. Improper wiring or grounding
could place dangerous voltage on the metal shell. If any of the conditions
are not as described, STOP. Ensure the improper voltage or impedance
conditions are corrected before proceeding. (D003)
An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous voltage
on metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the system. It is
the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired
and grounded to prevent an electrical shock. A lightning bolt symbol always
accompanies a danger notice to represent a dangerous electrical condition.
(D004)
When working on or around the system, observe the following precautions:

Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and communication

cables are hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard:
v If IBM supplied a power cord(s), connect power to this unit only with the
IBM provided power cord. Do not use the IBM provided power cord for
any other product.
v Do not open or service any power supply assembly.
v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation,
maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm.
v The product might be equipped with multiple power cords. To remove all
hazardous voltages, disconnect all power cords.
v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical
outlet. Ensure that the outlet supplies proper voltage and phase rotation
according to the system rating plate.
v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly
wired outlets.
v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables.
v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or
structural damage.
v Do not attempt to switch on power to the machine until all possible
unsafe conditions are corrected.
v Assume that an electrical safety hazard is present. Perform all continuity,
grounding, and power checks specified during the subsystem installation
procedures to ensure that the machine meets safety requirements.
v Do not continue with the inspection if any unsafe conditions are present.
v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems,
networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless
instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures.
v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures
when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached
devices.

xviii IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
 To disconnect:
1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise).
2. Remove the power cords from the outlets.
3. Remove the signal cables from the connectors.
4. Remove all cables from the devices.

To connect:
1. Turn off everything (unless instructed otherwise).
2. Attach all cables to the devices.
3. Attach the power cords to the outlets.
4. Turn on the devices.
v Sharp edges, corners and joints may be present in and around the system.
Use care when handling equipment to avoid cuts, scrapes and pinching.
(D005)
Heavy equipment - personal injury or equipment damage might result if
mishandled. (D006)
DANGER: Multiple power cords. The product might be equipped with
multiple power cords. To remove all hazardous voltages, disconnect all
power cords. (L003)

Caution notices

A caution notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to people because of some
existing condition, or to a potentially dangerous situation that might develop because of some unsafe
practice.

The doors and covers to the product are to be closed at all times except for
service by trained service personnel. All covers must be replaced and doors
closed at the conclusion of the service operation. (C013)
This product is equipped with a 3-wire (two conductors and ground) power
cable and plug. Use this power cable with a properly grounded electrical
outlet to avoid electrical shock. (C018)
This assembly contains mechanical moving parts. Use care when servicing
this assembly. (C025)

A caution notice can be accompanied by one of several symbols:

If the symbol is... It means...

A generally hazardous condition not represented by other safety symbols.

A hazardous condition due to the use of a laser in the product. Laser

symbols are always accompanied by the classification of the laser as defined
by the U. S. Department of Health and Human Services (for example, Class
I, Class II, and so forth).

Safety and environmental notices xix

If the symbol is... It means...
Risk of hand pinching, can trap hands, fingers and cause serious injury.
Keep hands clear during operation (L012).

The weight of this part or unit is between 18.1 and 33.6 kg (40 and 74 lb). It
takes two persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C009)

The weight of this part or unit is between 33.6 and 46.3 kg (74 and 102 lb).
It takes three persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C010)

A hazardous condition due to the unit's susceptibility to electrostatic

discharge.

Possible safety hazards

Possible safety hazards to the operation of this product are:
Electrical
An electrically charged frame can cause serious electrical shock.
Mechanical
Hazards (for example, a safety cover missing) are potentially harmful to people.
Chemical
Do not use solvents, cleaners, or other chemicals that are not approved for use on this product.

Before the library is used, repair any of the preceding problems.

Class I laser product

Before the library is used, review the following laser safety information.

xx IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

The product might contain a laser assembly that complies with the performance standards set by the US
Food and Drug Administration for a Class I laser product. Class I laser products do not emit hazardous
laser radiation. The product has the necessary protective housing and scanning safeguards to ensure that
laser radiation is inaccessible during operation or is within Class I limits. External safety agencies
reviewed the product and obtained approvals to the latest standards as they apply.

Acclimation
Server and storage equipment (racks and frames) must be gradually acclimated to the surrounding
environment to prevent condensation.

When server and storage equipment (racks and frames) is shipped in a climate where the outside
temperature is below the dew point of the destination (indoor location), there’s a possibility that water
condensation can form on the cooler inside and outside surfaces of the equipment when the equipment is
brought indoors.

Sufficient time must be allowed for the shipped equipment to gradually reach thermal equilibrium with
the indoor environment before you remove the shipping bag and energize the equipment. Follow these
guidelines to properly acclimate your equipment:
v Leave the system in the shipping bag. If the installation or staging environment allows it, leave the
product in the full package to minimize condensation on or within the equipment.
v Allow the packaged product to acclimate for 24 hours.1 if there are visible signs of condensation (either
external or internal to the product) after 24 hours, acclimate the system without the shipping bag for
an extra 12 - 24 hours or until no visible condensation remains.
v Acclimate the product away from perforated tiles or other direct sources of forced air convection to
minimize excessive condensation on or within the equipment.
1
Unless otherwise stated by product-specific installation instructions.

Note: Condensation is a normal occurrence, especially when you ship equipment in cold-weather
climates. All IBM® products are tested and verified to withstand condensation that is produced under
these circumstances. When sufficient time is provided to allow the hardware to gradually acclimate to the
indoor environment, there should be no issues with long-term reliability of the product.

Performing the safety inspection procedure

Before you service the unit, complete the following safety inspection procedure.
1. Stop all activities between the host and the library’s tape drives.
2. Turn off the power to the library by pushing in the Power button on the front of the tape library for 4
seconds.
3. Unplug the library’s power cord from the electrical outlet and the library’s power supply unit.
4. Check the library’s power cords for damage, such as a pinched, cut, or frayed cord.
5. If drives are FC/SAS attached, check the tape drive's FC/SAS cable for damage.
6. Check the top and bottom covers of the library for sharp edges, damage, or alterations that expose its
internal parts.
7. Check the top and bottom covers of the library for proper fit. They must be in place and secure.
8. Check the product label at the rear of the library to make sure that it matches the voltage at your
outlet.

Rack safety
The following general safety information must be used for all rack-mounted devices.

Safety and environmental notices xxi

DANGER

Observe the following precautions when working on or around your IT rack system.
v Heavy equipment - personal injury or equipment damage might result if mishandled.
v Always lower the leveling pads on the rack cabinet.
v Always install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.
v To avoid hazardous conditions due to uneven mechanical loading, always install the heaviest devices
in the bottom of the rack cabinet. Always install servers and optional devices starting from the bottom
of the rack cabinet.
v Rack-mounted devices are not to be used as shelves or work spaces. Do not place objects on top of
rack-mounted devices.
v Each rack cabinet might have more than one power cord. Be sure to disconnect all power cords in the
rack cabinet when directed to disconnect power during servicing.
v Connect all devices installed in a rack cabinet to power devices installed in the same rack cabinet. Do
not plug a power cord from a device installed in one rack cabinet into a power device installed in a
different rack cabinet.
v An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous voltage on the metal parts of the
system or the devices that attach to the system. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that
the outlet is correctly wired and grounded to prevent an electrical shock. (R001 part 1 of 2)

Caution

v Do not install a unit in a rack where the internal rack ambient temperatures might exceed the
manufacturer's recommended ambient temperature for all your rack-mounted devices.
v Do not install a unit in a rack where the air flow is compromised. Ensure that air flow is not blocked
or reduced on any side, front, or back of a unit that is used for air flow through the unit.
v Consideration must be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit so that
overloading of the circuits does not compromise the supply wiring or overcurrent protection. To
provide the correct power connection to a rack, refer to the rating labels on the equipment in the rack
to determine the total power requirement of the supply circuit.
v (For sliding drawers) Do not pull out or install any drawer or feature if the rack stabilizer brackets are
not attached to the rack. Do not pull out more than one drawer at a time. The rack might become
unstable if you pull out more than one drawer at a time.

xxii IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
v (For fixed drawers) This drawer is a fixed drawer and must not be moved for servicing unless
specified by the manufacturer. Attempting to move the drawer partially or out of the rack might cause
the rack to become unstable or cause the drawer to fall out of the rack. (R001 part 2 of 2)

Caution

Removing components from the upper positions in the rack cabinet improves rack stability during
relocation. Follow these general guidelines whenever you relocate a populated rack cabinet within a room
or building:
v Reduce the weight of the rack cabinet by removing equipment, starting at the top of the rack cabinet.
When possible, restore the rack cabinet to the configuration of the rack cabinet as you received it. If
this configuration is not known, you must do the following:
– Remove all devices in the 32U position (compliance ID RACK-001) or 22U (compliance ID RR001)
and above.
– Ensure that the heaviest devices are installed in the bottom of the rack cabinet.
– Ensure that there are little-to-no empty U-levels between devices installed in the rack-cabinet below
the 32U (compliance ID RACK-001) or 22U (compliance ID RR001) level, unless the received
configuration specifically allowed it.
v If the rack cabinet you are relocating is part of a suite of rack cabinets, detach the rack cabinet from the
suite.
v If the rack cabinet you are relocating was supplied with removable outriggers, they must be reinstalled
before the cabinet is relocated.
v Inspect the route that you plan to take to eliminate potential hazards.
v Verify that the route that you choose can support the weight of the loaded rack cabinet. Refer to the
documentation that comes with your rack cabinet for the weight of a loaded rack cabinet.
v Verify that all door openings are at least 760 x 2032 mm (30 x 80 in.).
v Ensure that all devices, shelves, drawers, doors, and cables are secure.
v Ensure that the four leveling pads are raised to their highest position.
v Ensure that no stabilizer bracket is installed on the rack cabinet during movement.
v Do not use a ramp that is inclined at more than 10 degrees.
v When the rack cabinet is in the new location, complete these steps.
– Lower the four leveling pads.
– Install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.
– If you removed any devices from the rack cabinet, repopulate the rack cabinet from the lowest
position to the highest position.

Safety and environmental notices xxiii

v If a long-distance relocation is required, restore the rack cabinet to the configuration of the rack cabinet
as you received it. Pack the rack cabinet in the original packaging material, or equivalent. Also, lower
the leveling pads to raise the casters off the pallet and bolt the rack cabinet to the pallet. (R002)

Power Cords
For your safety, IBM provides a power cord with a grounded attachment plug to use with this IBM
product. To avoid electrical shock, always use the power cord and plug with a properly grounded outlet.

IBM power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL)
and certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA).

For units intended to be operated at 115 volts: Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified cord set consisting of a
minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel
blade, grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 125 volts.

For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (U.S. use): Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified cord set
consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in
length and a tandem blade, grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 250 volts.

For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (outside the U.S.): Use a cord set with a grounding-type
attachment plug. The cord set should have the appropriate safety approvals for the country in which the
equipment will be installed.

IBM power cords for a specific country or region are usually available only in that country or region.

xxiv IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Preface
This manual contains information and instructions necessary for the installation, operation, and service of
the IBM TS4300 Tape Library.

Note: The IBM TS4300 Tape Library is a customer installed unit. The customer is responsible for the
setup and maintenance of the tape library. The customer is charged for service if a service contract is not
in place.

Related Publications

Refer to the following publications for more [Link] ensure that you have the latest publications,
visit the web at [Link]
v IBM TS4300 Tape Library Getting Started Guide (SC27-4630) provides unpacking and initial setup
information.
v IBM TS4300 Tape Library Knowledge Center at [Link]
STAKKZ/ provides online information about the TS4300 tape library.
v IBM TS4300 Tape Library SCSI Reference (SC27-4641) provides SCSI information.
v IBM Tape Device Driver Installation and User's Guide (GC27-2130) provides instructions for attaching
IBM-supported hardware to open-systems operating systems. It indicates what devices and levels of
operating systems are supported. It also gives requirements for adapter cards, and tells how to
configure hosts to use the device driver. All of the above are with the Ultrium family of devices.
v IBM Tape Device Driver Programming Reference (GA32-0566) supplies information to application owners
who want to integrate their open-systems applications with IBM-supported Ultrium hardware. The
reference contains information about the application programming interfaces (APIs) for each of the
various supported operating-system environments.
v IBM Environmental Notices and User Guide (ENUG) (z125-5823), which is located at ftp://
[Link]/systems/support/warranty/envnotices/
environmental_notices_and_user_guide.pdf.
v IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager Knowledge Center, which is located at [Link]
support/knowledgecenter/SSWPVP/welcome?lang=en, contains information to help you install,
configure, and use the IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager.
v The IBM Publications Center: [Link] The Publications Center
is a worldwide central repository for IBM product publications and marketing material with a catalog
of 70,000 items. Extensive search facilities are provided. Payment options for orders are with credit card
(in the US) or customer number for 20 countries. Many publications are available online in various file
formats, and they can all be downloaded by all countries, free of charge.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 xxv

xxvi IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
 Overview
The overview of the features and functions of the IBM® TS4300 tape library is useful for high-level
evaluation of the product and planning for the implementation of the product.

Introduction
The IBM TS4300 tape library provides compact, high-capacity, low-cost solutions for simple, unattended
data backup. The installation begins with the 3U high Base Module, with capacity for 32 tape cartridges
and 3 half-height LTO tape drives, or one full-height and one half-height tape drive.

Each module type has its special designation.

Table 3. Module designations
MTM Description
3555-L3A Base Module
3555-E3A Expansion Module

Figure 1 shows a two-module version of the tape library. The library on the left shows the base module
above the expansion module. The library on the right shows the base module below the expansion
module. An individual library can consist of one base module and up to 6 expansion modules. See
“Structure and supported library configurations” on page 2 for supported configurations.

Figure 1. Two module tape library

The library provides the following capabilities:

v New user interface for improved usability
v Updated library communication system
v I/O magazines to allow individual cartridge handling to be done independent of the library.
v Mixed media types
v Integrated management tools
v Scalability to seven modules
v Remote management with the management GUI
v Remote monitoring with Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
v Multipath architecture
v Host-based path failover
| v Sequential Mode option

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 1

Table 4. Minimum and maximum storage configurations
Configuration Capacity
32
Cartridges
28 with 4-slot I/O Station enabled1
Minimum
1 Module Library HH2 Tape Drives 3
Base Module only 2
FH Tape Drives 1
HH/FH Tape Drive Mix 1/1
272
Cartridges
268 with one 4-slot I/O Station enabled3

Maximum HH Tape Drives 21

7 Module Library FH Tape Drives 7
Base Module
6 Expansion Modules Nineteen half-height drives
to one full-height drive, or
HH/FH Tape Drive Mix
Seven half-height drives
to seven full-height drives
Notes:
1
v A single module (or the lowest module in a library) can have a 4-slot I/O Station. The lowest slot is inaccessible
to the accessor.
2
v HH = Half height. FH = Full height.
3
v Every module except the lowest one can contain a 5-slot I/O Station. If a seven Module library has an I/O
Station for each module, the maximum number of slots that can be configured as I/O slots are 34 (six modules
with 5-slot I/O Stations, and the lowest module with a 4-slot I/O Station).

Structure and supported library configurations

The TS4300 library supports a single base module tabletop configuration or a scalable rackmount
configuration.

Supported library configurations

All libraries start with a Base Module. Up to six Expansion Modules can be added as needed to support
customer requirements. The architecture is designed to support a maximum of three Expansion Modules
above the Base Module and three Expansion Modules below the Base Module. Table 5 on page 3 shows
the supported configurations for libraries, ranging 1 - 7 total modules.

Figure 2. Base Module

2 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Figure 3. Expansion Module

Table 5. Library configurations. Base module displays are yellow.

Module quantity Supported library configuration
1 module library
Base Module only

Figure 4. Base Module

2 module library
Base Module, and
1 Expansion Module

Figure 5. 2 module library

3 module library
Base Module, and
2 Expansion Modules

Figure 6. 3 module library

Overview 3
Table 5. Library configurations (continued). Base module displays are yellow.
Module quantity Supported library configuration
4 module library
Base Module, and
3 Expansion Modules

Figure 7. 4 module library

5 module library
Base Module, and
4 Expansion Modules

Figure 8. 5 module library

4 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Table 5. Library configurations (continued). Base module displays are yellow.
Module quantity Supported library configuration
6 module library
Base Module, and
5 Expansion Modules

Figure 9. 6 Module library

Overview 5
Table 5. Library configurations (continued). Base module displays are yellow.
Module quantity Supported library configuration
7 module library
Base Module, and
6 Expansion Modules

Figure 10. 7 module library

6 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Components
Front panel

Figure 11. Front panel

Table 6. Front panel descriptions

Number Item Comments
▌1▐ Screw holes for attachment to a rack
▌2▐ Left magazine access handle
▌3▐ Power Base Module only
▌4▐ Ready LED, Green Base Module only
▌5▐ Unit Identification LED, Blue Base Module only
▌6▐ Clean LED, Amber Base Module only
▌7▐ Attention LED, Amber Base Module only
▌8▐ Error LED, Amber Base Module only
▌9▐ USB port Base Module only
▌10▐ Operator Panel display Base Module only
▌11▐ Back/Return button Base Module only
▌12▐ Navigation button - Left Base Module only
▌13▐ Navigation button - Up Base Module only
▌14▐ Navigation button - Down Base Module only
▌15▐ Navigation button - Right Base Module only
▌16▐ Enter button Base Module only
▌18▐ I/O station/Right magazine access handle
▌19▐ Right magazine button
▌20▐ Left magazine button
▌21▐ Manual magazine release hole

Overview 7
Rear panel

Figure 12. Rear panel

Table 7. Rear panel descriptions

Number Item Comments
▌1▐ Power supply 1 Standard on Base Module
Optional on Expansion Module (required
if drives are present)
▌2▐ Power supply 2 Optional on Base Module and Expansion Modules
▌3▐ Tape drive bays
▌4▐ Upper Expansion Module connection port
▌5▐ USB port Base Module only
▌6▐ Ethernet port B Base Module only (secondary port for service usage)
▌7▐ Ethernet port A Base Module only
▌8▐ Module alignment mechanism
▌9▐ Lower Expansion Module connection port
▌10▐ Unit Identifier LED, Blue
▌11▐ Controller Error LED, Yellow
▌12▐ Controller Health Status LED, Green
▌13▐ Product Serial Number, Tag location

Physical and logical addresses of modules

The library assigns each module a unique address to indicate its physical location, shown in Figure 13 on
page 9. The physical numbering is bottom up on all modules.

8 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Figure 13. Physical numbering of modules

Magazines
Each module contains two magazines, holding up to 40 cartridges.

Overview 9
Figure 14. Left magazine

Figure 15. Right magazine

The library assigns each slot in a magazine a unique number to indicate its physical location. This
numbering is shown on the Cartridges page of the Management GUI.
Table 8. Physical numbering of storage slots - bottom module
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
4 9 14 19 24 29 34 39
Front of Front of
the Left 3 8 13 18 Drives 23 28 33 38 the Right
Magazine Magazine
2 7 12 17 22 27 32 37
1 6 11 16 21 26 31 36

Physical numbering of storage slots starts with the left magazine of the lowest module of your library. In
this module, the numbers of the lowest row (1, 6, 11, 16, 21, 26, 31, 36) are inaccessible to the accessor so

10 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

 that only 32 cartridges can be loaded. As modules are added above this module, the numbering
continues, starting with the lower left slot of the left magazine, and adding 40 storage slots for each
additional module.

Each module can be configured to contain an I/O Station, or one I/O Station can be accessed by several
modules. I/O Stations consist of five slots in the front column of the right magazine of each module,
except for the lowest module. The lowest module in a library can contain a 4-slot I/O Station only. To
enable or disable I/O Stations, go to Library > Modules and Magazines > Actions > Enable or Disable
I/O Station in the Management GUI.

| Important: Ensure that no tapes are in the slots before the I/O Station is enabled or disabled.

Power supply
The library provides a single power supply with each library. However, a secondary redundant power
supply for the base module can be added. In addition, each expansion module with drives installed
requires a power supply. See “Optional features” on page 34.

Figure 16. Power supply rear panel LEDs

Table 9. Power supply LEDs

Number Color Description
▌1▐ White AC power is connected, but Module
powered OFF
▌2▐ Green Module powered ON

Bar code reader

The high-speed bar code reader is a part of the Base Module. The bar code reader provides inventory
feedback to the host application, Operator Panel display, and Management GUI by reading cartridge bar
code labels. The library stores the customized inventory data in memory.

Library firmware supports a 6 or 8 character volume serial number (VOLSER) on the bar code label on
the tape cartridge. It is highly recommended to use bar code labeled cartridges. See “Labeling tape
cartridges” on page 153.

User interfaces
This library has two user interfaces: the Management GUI and the Operator Panel.

Overview 11
v “The Management GUI” on page 59 - With the Management GUI, you can monitor, configure, and
control the library from a web browser. The Management GUI hosts a dedicated, protected Internet site
that displays a graphical representation of the library. For information on network connectivity, see
“Network connectivity” on page 22.
v “The Operator Panel” on page 62 - With the Operator Panel, you can monitor, configure, and control
the library from the front panel. Functions are limited to those applicable to being in front of the
library.

Supported tape drives

The library supports LTO6 and later tape drives.

For minimum and maximum storage configurations, see Table 4 on page 2. For minimum firmware levels,
see “Minimum firmware levels for common library features” on page v.

Listed are the tape drives that are implemented and qualified for use in this library.
Table 10. Supported tape drives
Form factor Speeds of
Type (height) Interface Number of Ports connectivity Native data rate
LTO6 1U (Half-height) Serial Attached 2 6 Gbps SAS 160 MB/s
SCSI (SAS)
LTO6 1U (Half-height) Fibre Channel 1 8 Gbps FC 160 MB/s
(FC)
LTO6 2U (Full-height) Fibre Channel 2 8 Gbps FC 160 MB/s
(FC)
LTO7 1U (Half-height) Serial Attached 2 6 Gbps SAS 300 MB/s
SCSI (SAS)
LTO7 1U (Half-height) Fibre Channel 1 8 Gbps FC 300 MB/s
(FC)
LTO7 2U (Full-height) Fibre Channel 2 8 Gbps FC 300 MB/s
(FC)
LTO8 1U (Half-height) Serial Attached 2 6 Gbps SAS 300 MB/s
SCSI (SAS)
LTO8 1U (Half-height) Fibre Channel 1 8 Gbps FC 300 MB/s
(FC)
LTO8 2U (Full-height) Fibre Channel 2 8 Gbps FC 360 MB/s
(FC)

The LTO tape drives communicate with the library through an internal Ethernet interface. For enhanced
performance, the LTO tape drives include speed matching, channel calibration, and power management.
Speed matching dynamically adjusts the drive’s normal native (uncompressed) data rate to the slower
data rate of a server. Channel calibration customizes each read/write data channel for optimum
performance. The customization enables compensation for variations in the recording channel transfer
function, media characteristics, and read/write head characteristics. Power management reduces the
drive’s power consumption during idle power periods.

Control path drives

A control path is a logical path to the library.

12 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

A control path is the path for SCSI Medium Changer commands sent by a server to control a specific
logical library. The library has no direct SCSI connection to a host server. When a software host server
communicates with the library, it sends the communication by way of a tape drive. The tape drive is
designated as a control path drive.

Mixed drives
All supported generations of LTO tape drives and cartridges can be in the same physical library and
within a single module.

This library supports a mixture of LTO drive types in a logical library. Some independent software
vendors (ISVs) support mixed drive types within a logical library and other do not. Some ISVs that
support mixed drive types might have restrictions. For details, contact your ISV.

Figure 17 shows examples of methods for mixing LTO drive types in a logical library.

Figure 17. Mixed drives in a logical library

Drive sled back panels

Indicator LEDs are included on all drive sled back panels.

Six indicator LEDs are included on all drive sleds as shown in Figure 18.

Figure 18. Drive sled indicators

Overview 13
Table 11. Drive sled indicators
Number Description
▌1▐ Port 0 activity
▌2▐ Port 1 activity
▌3▐ Library communication
▌4▐ Cartridge present
▌5▐ Power
▌6▐ Beacon /UID

Figure 19. Half-height SAS dual port

Table 12. Half-height SAS dual port

Number Description
▌1▐ SAS port 0
▌2▐ SAS port 1
▌3▐ Drive sled indicators (see Figure 18 on page 13

Figure 20. Half-height FC single port

Table 13. Half-height FC single port

Number Description
▌1▐ FC port 0
▌2▐ Drive sled indicators (see Figure 18 on page 13

14 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Figure 21. Full-height FC dual port

Table 14. Full-height FC dual port

Number Description
▌1▐ FC port 0
▌2▐ FC port 1
▌3▐ Drive sled indicators (see Figure 18 on page 13

Physical and logical addresses of drives

The library assigns each tape drive a unique address to indicate its physical and logical location.

The library assigns each tape drive a unique address to indicate its physical location, shown in Figure 22
on page 16. The physical numbering is bottom up on all drives. This information is shown on the Drives
page of the Management GUI.

Overview 15
Figure 22. Physical numbering of drives

The library assigns each tape drive a SCSI element address that consists of a value that defines a logical
location in the library to the SCSI interface. It is assigned and used by the application when the host
server processes SCSI commands. The SCSI element address for a drive is unique to the location of the
drive. It does not vary based on other drives in the library. See “Library partitioning” on page 57.

Supported tape cartridges

This library supports LTO tape cartridges.

Within the library, the supported LTO tape drives use the following cartridge types:
v IBM LTO8 Data Cartridge
v IBM LTO8 WORM Data Cartridge
v IBM LTO M8 Data Cartridge
v IBM LTO7 Data Cartridge
v IBM LTO7 WORM Data Cartridge
v IBM LTO6 Data Cartridge
v IBM LTO6 WORM Data Cartridge
v IBM LTO5 Data Cartridge
v IBM LTO5 WORM Data Cartridge
v IBM LTO4 Data Cartridge
16 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
 v IBM LTO4 WORM Data Cartridge
v IBM Universal LTO Cleaning Cartridge

For information, see Appendix B, “LTO media,” on page 149.

Library functions
| The library provides many specific functions, such as random or sequential operating mode, encryption,
| library sharing, path failover, and alerts and logging.

| Random and Sequential Logical Library modes

| A Logical Library can be configured in one of two modes: Random and Sequential.

| Random Mode

| Random Mode is intended to be used by host applications that support SCSI media changer devices.
| Random Mode is the default.

| In Random mode,
| v The host application chooses the cartridges that are moved to the drive.
| v I/O slots provide the flexibility for the user to add and remove cartridges and the host application will
| be automatically notified of these changes.
| v Multiple drives can be assigned to provide parallel processing data operations and redundancy in case
| of failure.

| Sequential Mode

| Sequential Mode is intended to be used by host applications that aren’t supporting SCSI media changer
| devices but need to get another cartridge loaded if the current cartridge is full.

| In Sequential Mode,
| v The library predefines the sequential order the cartridges are moved to the drive.
| v I/O slots are hidden as they aren’t assignable to a logical library with sequential mode enabled.
| v Only one drive can be assigned to a logical library with sequential mode enabled.
| v There’s no control path drive and there will be no media changer device configured to the host server.

| Options to consider when Sequential Mode is chosen:

| v Basic Function - To initiate use of cartridges, the user issues a Move Cartridge command to the drive
| through the Management GUI. After the load, the host application can begin data I/O activity. When
| the host application unloads the drive, the library moves the next cartridge into the drive. This
| behavior is implicit, unless otherwise defined by selection of another option.
| v Loop Option - If a move sequence ends because no more cartridges are available in the current logical
| library, the sequence starts again by loading the first cartridge of the logical library. This option can be
| chosen with or without the Autoload function.
| v Autoload Option - If enabled, the library loads the first cartridge of the logical library to the Sequential
| Mode tape drive during library startup after inventory scan is finished. This option changes the
| implicit behavior of the Basic function. This option can be chosen with or without the Loop option.

| If storage slots are configured to I/O slots after assignment to a Sequential Mode logical library, they are
| still considered valid available slots and are used for movements. This option stays until you run the

Overview 17
| expert wizard again, and then these I/O slots no longer appear in the list of available slots. Finishing the
| expert wizard then sets the new slot assignment and these I/O slots can no longer be used for
| movements.

| To enable sequential mode, click the Enable Sequential Mode check box in the Basic Logical Library
| Wizard or Expert Logical Library Wizard.

Encryption
All supported tape drives in this library support encryption.

The encryption enabled drive contains the necessary hardware and firmware to encrypt and decrypt host
tape application data. Encryption policy and encryption keys are provided by the host application or host
server. A drive digital certificate is installed at manufacturing time. Each drive receives a unique serial
number and certificate. The T10 application might validate each drive instance by checking the drive's
digital certificate.

The library provides these options.

1. Encryption disabled
2. Application Managed Encryption (AME)
3. Library Managed Encryption (KMIP) (LME). LME is a built-in feature that is enabled by using a
purchased license. The LME feature can be ordered from the factory, or you can order it as a field
upgrade. To order a feature, contact your IBM Sales Representative or Business Partner. See Optional
Features. For configuration details, see “Configuring Library Managed Encryption (KMIP)” on page
71.
The default is Application Managed Encryption.

Note: All encryption settings must be configured or reverified in the drive after any library or drive
reset. A new drive might be added or an existing drive might be swapped with another drive.

Library sharing
The library can be configured into one or more logical libraries that can be shared by multiple
applications.

It is advantageous to be able to share a single physical library between heterogeneous or homogeneous

applications. However, some applications (and some servers) do not allow for sharing a library between
systems.

The library Management GUI provides two methods for logical library configuration.
1. A quick configuration for a simple one logical library configuration
2. An advanced configuration action for a multiple logical library configuration

The second method gives the ability to create configurations that enable the library to process commands
from multiple heterogeneous applications (such as an IBM System p application and a Windows
application) and multiple homogeneous applications (for example, the same application run by several
System p servers). See “Advanced library configuration” on page 56.

Control path failover, Data path failover, and load balancing

The path failover feature ensures the use of a redundant communication path when the primary path
fails.

Command failures and time outs are costly. You want your library to run smoothly and efficiently. Path
failover capabilities allow the IBM® device driver to resend a command to an alternate path. The alternate

18 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

path can include another host bus adapter (HBA), Storage Area Network (SAN), or library control path
drive. The device driver initiates error recovery and continues the operation on the alternate path without
interrupting the application.

Path failover and load balancing are built-in features that are enabled by using a purchased license. The
path failover feature can be ordered from the factory, or you can order it as a field upgrade. The path
failover feature (FC 1682) is activated on the Management GUI. To order features, contact your IBM®
Sales Representative or Business Partner. See “Optional features” on page 34.

Two types of path failover capabilities exist: control path failover (CPF) and data path failover (DPF). Control
refers to the command set that controls the library (the SCSI Medium Changer command set on LUN 1 of
the tape drives). Data refers to the command set that carries the customer data to and from the tape
drives (the SCSI-3 Stream Commands (SSC) device on LUN 0 of the tape drives). Path failover means the
same thing in both. Path failover is where redundancy is in the path from the application to the intended
target (the library accessor or the drive mechanism), the device driver transparently fails over to another
path in response to a break in the active path.

Both types of failover include host-side failover when configured with multiple HBA ports into a switch.
But CPF includes target-side failover through the control paths that are enabled on more than one tape
drive. DPF includes target-side failover for the dual-ported tape drives that are supported by the library.

DPF includes load balancing of the HBAs because the channel is a data-intensive path (the control path
carries little data, so load balancing is not an issue). The dynamic load balancing support optimizes
resources for devices that have physical connections to multiple HBAs in the same machine. When an
application opens a device where multiple HBA paths are configured, the device driver determines which
path has the HBA with the lowest usage and assigns that path to the application. When another
application opens a different device with multiple HBA paths, the device driver again determines the
path with the lowest HBA usage and assigns that path to the second application. The device driver
updates the usage on the HBA assigned to the application when the device is closed. Dynamic load
balancing uses all HBAs whenever possible and balances the load between them to optimize the
resources in the machine.

Both CPF and DPF require the use of the IBM device driver. They are supported exclusively with
products that bear the IBM logo on the operating systems that is indicated in Table 15.

Table 15 summarizes the differences between CPF, DPF, and load balancing.
Table 15. Differences between CPF and DPF
Characteristic CPF DPF and Load Balancing
1
Device type SMC SSC2
LUN3 LUN 1 LUN 0
Host-side failover Yes Yes6
Target-side failover Yes Yes6
IBM Device driver required Yes Yes
4 ®
Supported operating systems AIX , SuSE Linux, Red Hat AIX, SuSE Linux, Red Hat Enterprise
Enterprise Linux, Solaris, Windows Linux, Solaris, Windows5 (DPF only)
Order feature to obtain license Yes Yes

Overview 19
Table 15. Differences between CPF and DPF (continued)
Characteristic CPF DPF and Load Balancing
Notes:
1. SMC = SCSI-3 Medium Changer Specification (library)
2. SSC = SCSI-3 Stream Commands (drive)
3. LUN = logical unit number
4. See “Host connectivity” on page 21 for details.
5. Load balancing is not supported on Windows
6. Full-height tape drives only

For information about using these features, see the IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation and User's Guide
(GA32-0565).

Alerts and logging

The library sends alerts about the library and attached tape drives, and offers audit-logging to track user
actions.
v TapeAlert Support: The tape library is compatible with TapeAlert technology, which provides error
and diagnostic information about the drives and the library to the host application. The library
provides this error and diagnostic information as TapeAlert flags that are reported to the application by
the SCSI LOG SENSE command. See “TapeAlert flags” on page 99.
v Email (SMTP - Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) Notifications: The library can configure email
notification of library events. The library must have network access to an SMTP server. See “Locating
Management functions” on page 63.
v Remote Logging (rsyslog): The library can send syslog (system log) notifications to a configured
remote (rsyslog) server. When system events occur, the TS4300 tape library creates a log of these
events. With this notification feature configured, the library sends a notification of the event to the
syslog server. The syslog server keeps its own log of system events. (The syslog server is a
customer-provided server.) See “Locating Management functions” on page 63.
v SNMP Support: The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) allows the library to send alerts
over a LAN network to a monitoring server.
Occasionally, the library might encounter situations that you want to know about. These situations can
be conditions that affect the library performance, such as an open door that causes the library to stop.
You might also want to log user actions, such as a cartridge move or export that is initiated from the
Management GUI. SNMP messages can alert you of these conditions.
The library provides a standard TCP/IP protocol that is called SNMP to send alerts about conditions
over a TCP/IP LAN network to an SNMP monitoring server. These alerts are called SNMP traps.
Using the information that is supplied in each SNMP trap, the monitoring server (together with
customer-supplied software) can alert operations staff of possible problems or operator interventions
that occur. Many monitoring servers can be used to send email or pager notifications when they
receive an SNMP alert. See the manual for your network management application.
The monitoring server must be loaded with systems management software that can receive and process
the trap. SNMP supports a get and get-response mechanism for an operator to gather more information
about a problem or query the library about its status. Through a monitoring server, the operator enters
a "get" using SNMP to request information about the library. A get-response is the information that is
provided in response to the get. This type of support generally requires an up-to-date library
Management Information Base (MIB). The SNMP server's MIB contains units of information that
specifically describe an aspect of a system, such as the system name, hardware number, or
communications configuration.
IBM provides the MIBs that are supported by the library. They include
– IBM TS4300 MIB

20 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

 Type of information:
- The status of each drive in the library
- A list of all cartridges in the library
- The last trap or TapeAlert message that was sent by the library.
– IBM AUTOMATION QUERY MIB
Type of information:
- Library configuration
The library MIBs can be obtained through the SNMP Notifications Settings page on the Management
GUI. See “Locating Management functions” on page 63. An operator cannot change library settings by
using SNMP. Settings are changed by using the Management GUI.
SNMP Notification Levels
SNMP provides various levels of notification about specific library events and user actions.
– Inactive – No events are sent.
– Critical – Only critical events are sent.
– + Warnings – Only critical and warning events are sent.
– + Configuration – Only critical, warning, and configuration events are sent.
– + Information – All events are sent.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) audit logging provides logging information about
specific tape library user actions. To configure SNMP, see “Locating Management functions” on page
63.

Host connectivity
The library is supported by a wide variety of servers, operating systems, and adapters. There are many
ways to determine the servers and software that support this library.

Compatible servers and software

These attachments can change throughout the lifecycle of the product. To determine the newest
attachments, or to get a comprehensive list of compatible software, do one of the following actions.
v For a list of compatible software, operating systems, and servers for LTO tape drives, see
[Link]

Notes:
1. IBM does not provide application software with this library. To order software, contact your IBM
sales representative, IBM Business Partner, or an independent software provider.
2. If you attach your library to a server with non-IBM software, contact your software vendor for a
matrix of compatible hardware, software, firmware revisions, and adapter cards.
v For complete IBM storage interoperability information for the tape library in a storage area network
(SAN) configuration, see the IBM® Interoperation Center (SSIC) at [Link]
support/storage/ssic/[Link]. The SSIC has details on supported operating systems,
servers, switches, and adapters.

| Note: Dependent on the use of Random or Sequential Mode, the library might require an HBA with
multiple LUN supports. Also, multiple LUN supports must be enabled on the host computer. When
| multiple LUN supports are not enabled, the host computer can see the tape drive, but not the library. See
| “Random and Sequential Logical Library modes” on page 17.

Supported device drivers

IBM provides device driver support for the LTO tape drives, and the robotics in this library.

Overview 21
IBM maintains the current levels of device drivers and driver documentation on the web. Go to
[Link] and follow the steps to access this material.
1. From the Fix Central web page, choose the Select Product tab, select System Storage from the
Product Group list.
2. Select Tape Systems from the System Storage list.
3. Select Tape drivers and software from the Tape systems list.
4. Select Tape device drivers from the Tape drivers and software list.
5. Select the appropriate operating system from the Platform list and click Continue.
6. Select the appropriate driver from the list.

The IBM® Tape Device Drivers Installation and User's Guide can be found on the web at
[Link] .

Network connectivity
This library supports various browsers and interfaces.

Supported browsers

IBM supports higher versions of the browsers if the vendors don’t remove or disable functions that the
product relies upon. For browser levels higher than the versions that are certified with the product,
customer support accepts usage-related and defect-related service requests. As with operating system and
virtualization environments, if IBM support can’t re-create the issue in the lab, the client might be asked
to re-create the problem on a certified browser version to determine whether a product defect exists.
Defects aren’t accepted for cosmetic differences between browsers or browser versions that don’t affect
the functional behavior of the product. If a problem is identified in the product, defects are accepted. If a
problem is identified with the browser, IBM might investigate potential solutions or workarounds that the
client can implement until a permanent solution becomes available.

Supported interfaces

This tape library supports the Gigabit Ethernet interface in either auto negotiation or fixed modes of 10
Mbps, 100 Mbps, and 1 Gbps by using half or full duplex. The library supports the following TCP/IP
protocols:
IPv4 and IPv6 support
This tape library supports Internet Protocol (IP) addresses in both IPv4 and IPv6 format. Both the
integrated management console (IMC) and the management GUI allow the definition of IPv4 and
IPv6 addresses. The key proxy determines the IP version that is used and presents the correct IP
address and parameters to the IP Stack.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
SNMP traps are supported for drive and library events. SNMP management query functions are
supported by using a standard Management Information Block (MIB).
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP)
An embedded web server provides a management GUI for library management and query
capabilities.
Secure Socket Layer (SSL)
The tape library supports SSL, a protocol for transmitting private documents through the internet.
Key Management Interoperability Protocol (KMIP)
Used for communicating with the IBM® Security Lifecycle Key Manager and other security key
management software.

22 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
The tape library supports SMTP for sending email alerts.
Network Time Protocol (NTP)
The tape library supports NTP for external time-and-date synchronization.
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)
The tape library supports LDAP for centralized authentication.
Domain Name System (DNS)
The tape library supports DNS for flexible IP addressing.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
The library supports DHCP for automatically providing an Internet Protocol (IP) host with its IP
address and other related configuration information, such as the subnet mask and default
gateway.

Overview 23
24 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Planning
The library requires an environment able to accommodate the appropriate space, power, location, and
other technical specifications. Use this section as a reference for onsite requirements to allow for optimum
operation of the library.

Save your settings in the Appendix A, “Library Configuration Forms,” on page 143.

Library Layout and Location requirements

Information for planning the installation and layout of your library, including various specifications for
optimal performance.

For tabletop installation - Tabletop installations (one Base Module) require no additional hardware.

For rackmount installation - If possible, install the Base Module in the middle of the rack to provide
space for the allowed three Expansion Modules above it and three Expansion Modules below it. See
“Structure and supported library configurations” on page 2 for details.

Security

The equipment must be located so that access to the equipment can be controlled and monitored.
Consider all of these recommended security measures when you’re determining where to locate your
tape library.
Library location
You’re responsible for the security of this library, the cartridges that are contained within the
library, and shelf-resident cartridges. To prevent unauthorized access to data, IBM recommends
locating the library and all shelf-resident cartridges in an area where access is controlled.
Onsite security measures
You’re also responsible for evaluating, selecting, and implementing security features,
administrative procedures, and appropriate controls in application systems and communication
facilities.
Data security
Data security is accomplished through the Management GUI. See “Locating Management
functions” on page 63.

Location requirements

Choose a location that meets the criteria in Table 16.

Table 16. Location requirements
Criteria Definition
Rack requirements Standard 19-inch rack (minimum depth of 1 meter) with an appropriate # of Us
(Rack Units) of clearance for the planned module quantity (See Table 17 on page
26 for details.)
Rack space requirements 3U for the Base Module and 3U for each Expansion Module

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 25

Table 16. Location requirements (continued)
Criteria Definition
Power source v AC Power Voltage: 100 - 240 VAC
v Line Frequency: 50 - 60 Hz
v Library is located near AC outlet.
The AC power cord must be always easily accessible.
Air quality v Place the library in an area with minimal sources of particulate contamination.
v Avoid areas near frequently used doors and walkways, stacks of supplies that
collect dust, printers, and smoke-filled rooms.
v Excessive dust and debris can damage tapes and tape drive.

Technical specifications for this library can be referenced in the following tables.

Physical specifications
Table 17. Physical specifications
Characteristic Product alone Packaged
Height 133 mm 694 mm
Width 480 mm1 667 mm
Depth 873 mm 1194 mm
Weight Base module: 21 Kg Base module: 30 Kg
Expansion module: 13 Kg Expansion module: 23 Kg
1
Includes front covering of rack rails, allowing for magazine opening clearance.

Electrical specifications
Table 18. Electrical specifications
Characteristic Specification
Current 5.0 - 3.5 A
Voltage 100 - 240 V 50/60 Hz
Power 350 W

Equipment environmental specifications

Table 19. Environmental specifications
Product operation1,2 Product power off 2,3

Dry-bulb temperature Humidity range Maximum Maximum Maximum Dry-bulb Relative Maximum
Non-condensing dew point elevation rate of temper- humidity dew point
change6 ature (%)
Allow- Recom- Allow- Recom-
(°/hour)
able4 mended5 able mended
(% RH)
15-32°C 18-25°C 20 - 80 5.5°C 17°C 3050 m 5°C/20 5-45°C 8 - 80 27°C
(60-90°F) (64-80°F) (42°F) (63°F) (10000 ft.) (41°F/20) (41-113°F) (81°F)
DP to
60% RH
and 15°C
(60°F)

26 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Table 19. Environmental specifications (continued)
Product operation1,2 Product power off 2,3

Notes:
1. Product equipment is powered on.
2. Tape products require a stable and more restricted environment (similar to Class 1). Typical requirements:
minimum temperature is 15°C (60°F), maximum temperature is 32°C (90°F), minimum relative humidity is 20%,
maximum relative humidity is 80%, maximum dew point is 22°C (72°F), rate of change of temperature is less
than 2°C/h (36°F/h), rate of change of humidity is less than 5% RH per hour, and no condensation.
3. Product equipment is removed from the original shipping container and installed but not in use, for example,
during repair, maintenance, or upgrade.
4. Derate maximum dry-bulb temperature 1°C/300 m (34°F/984 ft.) above 900 m (2 953 ft.).
5. Derate maximum recommended dry-bulb temperature 1°C/300 m (34°F/984 ft.) above 1 800 m (5 905 ft.)
6. 5°C/h (41°F/h) for data centers employing tape drives and 20°C/h (68°F/h) for data centers employing disk
drives.

Gas and particulate exposure

Table 20. Gas and particulate exposure
Contamination Requirement
Gaseous contamination Severity level G1 as per ANSI/ISA 71.04-19851, which states that the reactivity rate of
copper coupons shall be less than 300 Angstroms per month (Å/month, ≈ 0.0039
µg/cm² - hour weight gain)2. In addition, the reactivity rate of silver coupons shall be
less than 300 Å/month (≈ 0.0035 µg/cm² - hour weight gain)3. The reactive monitoring
of gaseous corrosivity should be conducted approximately 5 cm (2 in.) in front of the
rack on the air inlet side at one-quarter and three-quarter frame height off the floor or
where the air velocity is much higher.
Particulate contamination Data centers must meet the cleanliness level of ISO 14644-1 class 8. For data centers
without airside economizer, the ISO 14644-1 class 8 cleanliness might be met by the
choice of the following filtration:
v The room air might be continuously filtered with MERV 8 filters.
v Air entering a data center might be filtered with MERV 11 or preferably MERV 13
filters.
For data centers with airside economizers, the choice of filters to achieve ISO class 8
cleanliness depends on the specific conditions present at that data center. The
deliquescent relative humidity of the particulate contamination should be more than
60% [Link] centers must be free of zinc whiskers5.
Notes:
1. ANSI/ISA-S71.04. 1985. Environmental conditions for process measurement and control systems: Airborne contaminants,
Instrument Society of America, Research Triangle Park, NC, 1985.
2. The derivation of the equivalence between the rate of copper corrosion product thickness growth in Å/month
and the rate of weight gain assumes that Cu2S and Cu2O grow in equal proportions.
3. The derivation of the equivalence between the rate of silver corrosion product thickness growth in Å/month and
the rate of weight gain assumes that Ag2S is the only corrosion product.
4. The deliquescent relative humidity of particulate contamination is the relative humidity at which the dust
absorbs enough water to become wet and promote ionic conduction.
5. Surface debris is randomly collected from 10 areas of the data center on a 1.5 cm diameter disk of sticky
electrically conductive tape on a metal stub. If examination of the sticky tape in a scanning electron microscope
reveals no zinc whiskers, the data center is considered free of zinc whiskers.

Planning 27
Power cords
Electrical and safety information, and feature codes for purchasing power cords.

To avoid electrical shock, a power cord with a grounded attachment plug is provided. Use
only properly grounded outlets.

Table 21 lists the power cord part number, feature code, the country, or region where the
power cord is used, and the plug's standard reference. The last column in the table contains
an index number that you can match to a specific receptacle type in Figure 23 on page 32.

All power cords use an appliance coupler that complies with the International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Standard 320, Sheet C13.

If the power cord that you receive does not match your receptacle, contact your local dealer.

Power cords that are used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter's
Laboratories (UL), are certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA), and comply
with the plug standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). For
other worldwide geographies, plug standards are listed in Table 21.

Table 21. Power cords

Description, Feature Code Plug Standard Country or Region Index Number in Figure 23
(FC), and Part Number Reference on page 32
(P/N)
US/Canada NEMA 5-15P Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, 1
v 2.8 m, 125 V Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil,
Canada, Cayman Islands,
v FC 9800
Colombia, Costa Rica,
v P/N 95P2344 Curacao, Dominican
Republic, Ecuador, El
Salvador, Guatemala, Guyana,
Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica,
Japan, Liberia, Mexico,
Netherlands Antilles,
Nicaragua, Panama, Peru,
Philippines, Saudi Arabia,
South Korea, Suriname,
Taiwan, Trinidad Tobago,
Venezuela, US
Chicago NEMA 5-15P Chicago, U.S.A. 1
v 1.8 m, 125 V
v FC 9986
v P/N 39M5080
US/Canada NEMA 6-15P Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, 2
v 2.8 m, 250 V Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil,
Canada, Cayman Islands,
v FC 9833
Costa Rica, Curacao,
v P/N 95P2353 Dominican Republic, Ecuador,
El Salvador, Guatemala,
Guyana, Haiti, Honduras,
Jamaica, Japan, Liberia,
Netherlands Antilles,
Nicaragua, Panama, Peru,
Philippines, Suriname,
Taiwan, Thailand, Trinidad
Tobago, Venezuela, US

28 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Table 21. Power cords (continued)
Description, Feature Code Plug Standard Country or Region Index Number in Figure 23
(FC), and Part Number Reference on page 32
(P/N)
Australia AS 3112 Australia, China, Colombia, 3
v 2.8 m, 250 V New Zealand, Papua New
NZS 198 Guinea, Paraguay, Uruguay,
v FC 9831
Western Samoa
v P/N 95P2352
France, Germany CEE 7 - VII Afghanistan, Algeria, 4
v 2.8 m, 250 V Andorra, Angola, Aruba,
Austria, Belgium, Benin,
v FC 9820
Brazil, Bulgaria, Burkina
v P/N 95P2345 Faso, Burundi, Cameroon,
Central African Republic,
Chad, Congo-Brazzaville,
Curacao, Czech Republic,
Democractic Republic of
Congo, Denmark, Egypt,
Finland, France, French
Guiana, Germany, Greece,
Guinea, Hungary, Iceland,
Indonesia, Iran, Ivory Coast,
Jordan, Kenya, Korea,
Lebanon, Luxembourg,
Macau, Malagasy, Mali,
Martinique, Mauritania,
Mauritius, Monaco, Morocco,
Mozambique, Netherlands,
Netherlands Antilles, New
Caledonia, Niger, Norway,
Poland, Portugal, Romania,
Russia, Saudi Arabia, Senegal,
Spain, Sweden, Sudan, Syria,
Togo, Tunisia, Turkey,
Yugoslavia, Zaire, Zimbabwe,
Vietnam
Denmark DK2-5A Denmark 5
v 2.8 m, 250 V
v FC 9821
v P/N 95P2346
South Africa SABS 164 Bangladesh, Burma, Pakistan, 6
v 2.8 m, 250 V South Africa, Sri Lanka
v FC 9829
v P/N 95P2350

Planning 29
Table 21. Power cords (continued)
Description, Feature Code Plug Standard Country or Region Index Number in Figure 23
(FC), and Part Number Reference on page 32
(P/N)
United Kingdom BS 1363 Antigua, Bahrain, Bermuda, 7
v 2.8 m, 250 V Brunei, Channel Islands,
China (Hong Kong S.A.R.),
v FC 9825
Cyprus, Fiji, Ghana, Guyana,
v P/N 95P2347 India, Iraq, Ireland, Jordan,
Kenya, Kuwait, Malaysia,
Malawi, Malta, Nepal,
Nigeria, Oman, Polynesia,
Qatar, Sierra Leone,
Singapore, Tanzania, Uganda,
UK, United Arab Emirate
(Dubai), Yemen, Zambia
Switzerland SEV S/N 416534 Liechtenstein, Switzerland 8
v 2.8 m, 250 V
v FC 9828
v P/N 95P2349
Italy CEI 23- 16 Chile, Ethiopia, Italy, Libya, 9
v 2.8 m, 250 V Somalia
v FC 9830
v P/N 95P2351
Israel S11-32-1971 Israel 10
v 2.8 m, 250 V
v FC 9827
v P/N 95P2348
Argentina IEC 83-A5 Argentina, Brazil, Colombia, 11
v 2.8 m, 250 V Paraguay, Trinidad Tobago,
Uruguay
v FC 9834
v P/N 95P2354
China CCEE People's Republic of China 12
v 2.8 m, 250 V
v FC 9840
v P/N 95P2355
Taiwan LV* CNS 10917-3 Taiwan 13
v 2.8 m, 125 V
v FC 9835
v P/N 23R3263
Taiwan HV** CNS 10917-3 Taiwan 14
v 2.8 m, 250 V
v FC 9841
v P/N 23R6120
Japan LV* JIS C8303, C8306 Japan 15
v 2.8 m, 125 V
v FC 9842
v P/N 23R6121

30 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Table 21. Power cords (continued)
Description, Feature Code Plug Standard Country or Region Index Number in Figure 23
(FC), and Part Number Reference on page 32
(P/N)
Japan HV** JIS C8303, C8306 Japan 16
v 2.8 m, 250 V
v FC 9843
v P/N 39M5186
Korea HV** KS C8305, K60884-1 Korea 17
v 2.8 m, 250 V
v FC 9844
v P/N 23R6123
India HV** IS 6538 India 18
v 2.8 m, 250 V
v FC 9845
v P/N 23R6124
Brazil LV* InMetro NBR 6147 Brazil 19
v 2.8 m, 125 V
v FC 9846
v P/N 39M5233
Brazil HV** InMetro NBR 14136 Brazil 20
v 2.8 m, 250 V
v FC 9847
v P/N 23R6126
Rack PDU
v FC 9848
v P/N 23R6328
* Low Voltage

** High Voltage

Figure 23 on page 32 shows the plugs that are used by the power cords in Table 21 on page 28. Match the
index number that is beside each plug to the index number in the table.

Planning 31
Figure 23. Types of receptacles

Network requirements
The library supports an independent customer network.

It is the customer’s responsibility to provide the proper length Ethernet cable for this connectivity.

The base module controller card has two Ethernet ports, which offer primary and redundant customer
network connectivity. See “Rear panel” on page 8.

These connections allow remote viewing and management of the library with the Management GUI.

Note: Have your network settings handy to use for entering on the Operator Panel. Your network
settings can also be stored as hardcopy on Appendix A, “Library Configuration Forms,” on page 143.

The secondary Ethernet port might be used for service. Three models are available for connection:
v No Ethernet port - Service personnel can connect a laptop to the customer network to use the
Management GUI with service login.
v Dedicated secondary Ethernet port - The secondary network port that is dedicated only for service
personnel to connect a laptop directly to the library.

32 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

v Secondary Ethernet port - The secondary network port can be disconnected and service personnel can
use it to connect a laptop directly to the library.

IP range selection

For internal communication between modules, the tape library uses an Ethernet connection with an
internal IP address range. To prevent any conflict between the internal IP address range and the external
IP addresses, you must select the internal IP range. Choosing the Internal IP address range, and also
entering the external IP address information is part of the initial setup of the library.

Host requirements
The library requires attachment to supported SAS or FC HBAs.

The library requires attachment to supported SAS or FC HBAs. See “Host connectivity” on page 21.

Static Sensitive

Risk of damage to devices

v A discharge of static electricity damages static-sensitive devices or
micro circuitry.
v Proper packaging and grounding techniques are necessary
precautions to prevent damage.

Follow these general guidelines.

v Check with a system administrator before the host computer is powered off.
v For a SAS library, confirm availability or install a SAS HBA that supports multiple LUNs.
v For a direct-attach Fibre Channel library, confirm availability of installation of an FC HBA.
v For connection of a Fibre Channel library through a compatible switch, verify that sufficient ports are
available.

Persistent binding to ensure SCSI ID assignment

When a server is booted, devices are discovered and assigned SCSI target and LUN IDs. It is possible for
these SCSI assignments to change between boots. Some operating systems do not guarantee that devices
are always allocated the same SCSI target ID after rebooting. Also, some software depends on this
association, so you do not want it to change. The issue of SCSI ID assignment is addressed by persistent
binding.

Persistent binding is an HBA function that allows a subset of discovered targets to be bound between a
server and device. Implemented by a worldwide node name (WWNN) or worldwide port name
(WWPN), persistent binding causes a tape drive's WWNN to be bound to a specific SCSI target ID. After
a configuration is set, it survives restarts and any hardware configuration changes because the
information is preserved. If a drive must be replaced, the new drive assumes the WWNN of the old drive
because the WWNN for the drive is location-dependent within the library. Because the WWNN does not
change, persistent binding does not need changing, thus preventing a potential outage.

Planning 33
 Optional features
More features that are available for your library.

To order extra features, contact your IBM sales representative or Business Partner.
Table 22. Optional features
Feature Code Description
1411 Fibre wrap tool
1412 SAS wrap tool
1682 Path Failover
1899 First Power Supply
1900 Extra Power Supply
7002 Rack Mount Kit
8106 Right Side Magazine
8109 Left Side Magazine
5500 Mini-SAS/Mini-SAS 4x Interposer
5502 2 m Mini-SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable
5507 4 m Mini-SAS HD/Mini-SAS 1x Cable

Enables attachment of a single tape drive to a host with HD applications (from HD HBA with
SFF-8644 to Drive with SFF-8088 connector).
5509 3 m Mini-SAS HD/Mini-SAS 2x Cable

Enables attachment of one or two tape drives to a host with HD applications, from HD HBA
with SFF-8644 to Drives with SFF-8088 connectors. This cable fans out to enable connection of
two devices to one HBA port.
5900 Encryption Configuration
AGK1 10-meter OM3 fiber Cable (LC)
AGK2 25-meter OM3 fiber Cable (LC)
AGKF LTO 6 HH Fibre Channel Drive
AGKG LTO 6 HH SAS Drive
AGKH LTO 6 FH Fibre Channel Drive
AGKJ LTO 7 HH Fibre Channel Drive
AGKK LTO 7 HH SAS Drive
AGKL LTO 7 FH Fibre Channel Drive
AGKM LTO 8 HH Fibre Channel Drive
AGKN LTO 8 HH SAS Drive
AGKP LTO 8 FH Fibre Channel Drive
8002 Cleaning Cartridge L1 UCC
8806 LTO 8 Data Cartridges (5-pack)
| 5521 LTO M8 Data Cartridges (20-pack)
8706 LTO 7 Data Cartridges (5-pack)
8605 LTO 6 Data Cartridges (5-pack)
9800 - 9847 Power cords
9848 Rack Power Distribution Unit (PDU) power cord

34 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Installing
Use this section to follow the procedures to install and configure your library.
Table 23. Installation Precautions
Product Weight

Caution: The weight of this part or unit is between 18.1 and 33.6 kg
(40 and 74 lb). It takes two persons to safely lift this part or unit.
(C009)

Caution: The weight of this part or unit is between 33.6 and 46.3 kg
(74 and 102 lb). It takes three persons to safely lift this part or unit.
(C010)

Risk of personal injury

Before a module is lifted or moved

v Observe local health and safety requirements and guidelines for
manual material handling.
v Remove all tapes to reduce the weight and to prevent cartridges
from falling into the robotics path and damaging the library.
v Remove all tape drives to reduce the weight.
v Obtain adequate assistance to lift and stabilize the module during
installation or removal.

Risk of damage to devices

When a module is placed into or the module is removed from a rack

v Extend the rack’s leveling jacks to the floor.
v Ensure that the full weight of the rack rests on the leveling jacks.
v Install stabilizing feet on the rack.
v Extend only one rack component at a time.

v Do not expose the library to moisture.

v Do not place a module on either the ends or sides as this action
might cause damage.

Complete these procedures to install your library hardware.

1. “Unpacking the Base Module and Expansion Modules” on page 36
2. “Identifying Library Module components” on page 40.
3. “Preparing top and bottom modules” on page 40.
4. “Installing modules in a rack” on page 43.
5. “Installing a tabletop module” on page 47.
6. “Aligning and connecting modules” on page 47
7. “Validating tape drive installation” on page 50.
8. “Connecting cables” on page 50.
9. “Powering on the library” on page 52

Complete these procedures to configure your library.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 35

1. “The Initial Setup process” on page 52
2. “Initial configuration and customization” on page 53
3. “Labeling and loading tape cartridges” on page 54
4. “Verifying the installation” on page 55
5. “Advanced library configuration” on page 56
6. “Verifying the host connection” on page 58

Unpacking the Base Module and Expansion Modules

Procedure for safely unpacking the Base and Expansion Modules.

Before any modules are unpacked, clear a work surface near the targeted rack or table for installation.

Attention: If the temperature in the room where the library operates varies by 15° C (30° F) from where
the module was stored, allow it to acclimate for at least 12 hours before it is unpacked.

Unpacking a Base Module or Expansion Module

1. Before a module is opened or removed from the box, inspect the container for shipping damage.
2. If you notice any damage, report it to the shipping company immediately.
3. Remove the module from the box.

Important: Lift the module out of the box by the long sides, not by the display.

Figure 24. Removing the module from the box

4. Check that all components for assembling the module are in the box. See “Identifying Library
Module components” on page 40.

36 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Figure 25. The module after removal from the box

Attention: Do not place a module on either the ends or sides as this action can damage the
module.
5. Unlatch the top of the module by using your fingers or a small tool, one on each side of the lid, and
press inward. When the lid is opened, remove it by pulling it forward. See Figure 26 on page 38.

Installing 37
Figure 26. Unlatching the top of the module

Figure 27. Removing the top of the module

6. Remove the foam packing from the inside of the module.

38 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Figure 28. The module is opened to show the foam packing.

7. After the packing is removed, the internal components are shown.

Figure 29. The foam packing is removed, and the internal components are shown - Base Module.

8. Install the top cover if you do not plan to add modules above this module.
9. Save the packaging materials for future use.
10. If you are adding extra modules, go to “Preparing top and bottom modules” on page 40.

Installing 39
Identifying Library Module components
Use the packing slip that is included with your module to identify the module components.

The TS4300 model 3555 is not shipped with a rack mount kit (IBM FC: 7002) and/or power cord (IBM
FC: 9800-9848) unless it is ordered.
1. Locate one or more packing slips for your module.
2. Verify that you received each item that is listed on the packing slips.

Note: Order the power cord that matches the electrical requirements of the country or area. Power cord
FC 9848 must be ordered with the rack mount kit if a rack-based power supply is used.

For SAS libraries, you must provide SAS cabling with the correct configuration for your HBA. For Fibre
Channel libraries, you must provide one Fibre Channel cable for each tape drive. See “Optional features”
on page 34.

Preparing top and bottom modules

Use these steps to prepare the top and bottom modules for installation.

Skip this step if you are installing a Base Module only without an Expansion Module.

The Base Module has a removable top and bottom covers.

Installing Expansion Modules above the Base Module

If you are installing one or more Expansion Modules above the Base Module, move the top cover from
the Base Module to the Expansion Module that is installed at the top of the library.

To move the library top cover plate from the Base Module to an Expansion Module
1. Remove the library top cover plate from the Base Module. See Step 5 in “Unpacking the Base Module
and Expansion Modules” on page 36.
2. Install the top cover on the Expansion Module that is installed on the top of the library.
a. Place the Expansion Module on a work table.
b. With the front of the top cover raised approximately 12 cm, engage the rear of the cover at the
Expansion Module pivot point at the back of the opening.
c. Lower the front of the top cover until the latches engage on both sides.

40 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Figure 30. Lowering the front of the top cover

Installing Expansion Modules below the Base Module

If you are installing one or more Expansion Modules below the Base Module, move the bottom cover
from the Base Module to the Expansion Module that is installed at the bottom of the library

To move the library bottom cover plate from the Base Module to an Expansion Module
1. Remove the library bottom cover plate from the Base Module.
a. Place the Base Module on a work table.
b. Lift the unit front end by about 16 cm (use unit rear as a pivot edge).
c. Support the bottom cover with one hand. Insert a small flathead screwdriver or Torx screwdriver
into the hole and slide about 4 mm sidewards to the left to unlock the spring loaded lock. See
Figure 31 on page 42.

Important: Do NOT turn the module upside-down to complete this step.

Installing 41
Figure 31. Unlocking the spring loaded lock

d. Lower the cover front end by about 10 cm (▌1▐) and pull gently forward (▌2▐) to disengage from
the pivot point at the unit center.

Figure 32. Removing the cover

2. Install the library bottom cover plate to an Expansion Module.

a. Place the Expansion Module on a work table.
b. Lift the unit front end by about 16 cm (use unit rear as a pivot edge).
c. Insert the bottom cover at the center
d. Lift the cover front edge until hard stop and it locks in at the unit front. The bottom cover fits
only one way.

42 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Figure 33. Lifting the cover and locking it

Installing modules in a rack

Rackmount installation procedure.

Modules are easy to install in racks that are compliant to the EIA 310A Standard, when at least 1 meter
deep. You need a #2 Phillips screwdriver for this process.

Note: Install modules from the bottom to the top. Refer to “Structure and supported library
configurations” on page 2 for the correct configuration of Base and Expansion Modules.

To locate the rail locations when multiple modules are installed.

1. Locate the bottom of the lowest full U where the lowest module is installed.
2. Continue identifying the locations for any additional module 3U higher.
To install the rails into the rack, starting from the lowest rack location.
a. Locate the four universal rack connectors, four Philips screws, and two rackmount rails (LH and
RH).

Note: The universal rack connectors have two sides, for round hole and square hole racks. The
square-hole side might be painted.

Installing 43
Figure 34. Universal rack connector

b. On the inside of the racks, facing out, mount the connectors at the appropriate height to the right
and left rack posts. Mount them in the middle hole of the height unit (the middle of a height unit
is the hole between two wide and neighboring division bars) in both front and back. The four
screw holes must align with the holes on your rack. If they do not, the blocks are not in the
correct location. See Figure 35 and Figure 36 on page 45.

Note: If the connectors are installed incorrectly, the screws on the connectors do not match the
holes on the frames. The circles in the graphics highlight the mismatch.

Figure 35. Incorrect connector locations

44 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Figure 36. Correct connector locations

c. Repeat step b on the right and left rack posts in the rear of the rack.
d. Mount the LH Rackmount rail to the connectors. See Figure 37.
e. Repeat step d with the RH Rackmount Rail.

Figure 37. Mounting the rails to the connectors

Installing 45
Figure 38. Side rails installed

3. Place the library at the front of the rack on the support angles of the rails and push it into the rack to
the back stop.

Figure 39. Sliding the library into the rack

4. If you are installing multiple modules, verify that this module is installed directly above or below its
adjacent module and is contained within the correct 3U volume. Remove the tape that is covering the
alignment pin lock/unlock lever on the rear of each module. The gap between modules must be less
than 4 mm.

46 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Figure 40. Library in the rack

Important: Each module must be on its own rails.

5. With a Phillips screwdriver, loosely screw the module to the front of the rack, one screw on each side.
See the circled areas in Figure 40.
6. Align the module as needed. Then, tighten the screws on each side of the module. See “Aligning and
connecting modules.”
7. Repeat steps 2 - 6 to install the rest of the modules into the rack.

Installing a tabletop module

Installation of a one module library (Base Module only) can be completed without special hardware.

If you unpacked a Table Top Module, confirm that you received the following components:
1. Base Module
2. Accessory Kit
v One North American power cord
v One European power cord
1. Remove the Base Module from the box.
2. Open the cover and remove the foam packing from inside the enclosure. See “Unpacking the Base
Module and Expansion Modules” on page 36.
3. Replace the cover.
4. Set the Base Module in the wanted location. Ensure that it is level.
5. Plug in the power cord and the connecting cables.

Aligning and connecting modules

Aligning the modules ensures that the accessor can move freely between the modules.

Skip this step if the library does not have Expansion Modules.

Aligning the modules ensures that the accessor can move freely between the modules. The library cannot
operate unless the alignment mechanisms of the upper modules are in the locked position, and the
alignment mechanism of the lowest module is unlocked.
Installing 47
1. From the front of the library, loosen the screws on each of the modules where they are attached to the
rails two full turns.
2. From the back of the library, starting with the bottom pair of modules, align each module with the
module below it. Repeat for each pair of modules. Refer to Figure 42.
a. Move the alignment lever of the upper of the pair of modules to the locked or engaged position. If
you encounter resistance, adjust the position of the upper module so the pin in the alignment
mechanism moves into the mating hole in the lower module.

Note: If a blue alignment lever lock is attached to the rear of the module, slide it to the left, then
move the alignment lever. The lever lock has an internal spring, so hold it while the alignment
lever is moved, and it automatically springs back into place after the lever is moved. See
Figure 41.

Figure 41. Alignment lever lock

Figure 42. Alignment lever locked or engaged to lower module

48 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Figure 43. Alignment lever unlocked or disengaged

3. Verify that the lowest module in the library has its alignment lever is in the unlocked or disengaged
position.

Figure 44. Two modules in rack, seen from the rear

▌1▐ Locked
▌2▐ Unlocked

4. From the front of the library, tighten the Philips screws on each of the modules to secure the modules
to the rack.
5. From the back of the library, connect the modules of each pair to its adjacent module by using the
expansion interconnect cables (▌1▐) as shown in Figure 45 on page 50.

Note: The top module's top connector and the bottom module's bottom connector has nothing
plugged into them.

Installing 49
Figure 45. Connected modules

Validating tape drive installation

Tape drives come already installed in the library modules.
v Half-height tape drives can be installed in any drive bay in a module.
v Full-height tape drives must be installed in the lowest two bays of a module. Installing a full-height
drive in the top two bays of a module is not supported.

Connecting cables
Procedures to connect Fibre Channel, SAS, USB, and Ethernet cables.

Connecting Fibre Channel cables

1. Remove the FC port caps if necessary. Attach one end of the FC cable to port 0 on the tape drive.

Figure 46. Full-height FC dual port

50 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Table 24. Full-height FC dual port
Number Description
▌1▐ FC port 0
▌2▐ FC port 1
▌3▐ Drive sled indicators (see Figure 18 on page 13)

Figure 47. Half-height FC single port

Table 25. Half-height FC single port

Number Description
▌1▐ FC port 0
▌2▐ Drive sled indicators (see Figure 18 on page 13)

2. Attach the other end of the FC cable to a switch or HBA.

3. Repeat the same process with port 1 if you have a dual port drive.

Connecting SAS cables

1. Attach the end of the SAS cable into the connector on the HBA. If you are using a SAS
fanout/Interposer cable, the end of the cable with only one connector must be plugged into the HBA.
2. Connect the drive end of the cable.
v If you are using a cable with a single connector on each end, attach the other end into the
connector on the tape drive.
v If you are using a SAS fanout/Interposer cable, attach one mini-SAS connector into the connector
on each tape drive. The unused ends of the SAS fanout/Interposer cable are single channel and not
suitable for use with disk arrays. Use the other ends to connect tape drives, or coil and secure them
to the rack to minimize stress on the connectors.

Figure 48. Half-height SAS dual port

Installing 51
Table 26. Half-height SAS dual port
Number Description
▌1▐ SAS port 0
▌2▐ SAS port 1
▌3▐ Drive sled indicators (see Figure 18 on page 13)

Note: SAS signal rates require clean connections between the HBA and tape drive. Do not use adapters
or converters between the HBA and the tape drive. For reliable operation, use a maximum SAS cable
length of 6 meters.

Connecting USB cables

Two USB ports are on the library, one in the front and one in the rear. USB connections are used by
service personnel for diagnostic and service procedures. Attach one end of the USB cable to your
notebook or other device and the other end to the front or rear USB port of the library.

Important: USB cable lengths of more than 3 meters are NOT supported for the front or rear USB ports.

Connecting Ethernet cables

To use the Management GUI, connect an Ethernet cable from the bottom Ethernet port on the Base
Module controller to your network. See “Rear panel” on page 8 for the location of the Ethernet ports.

Note: Ethernet port A (bottom Ethernet port) is the primary port. The second Ethernet port, Port B, is for
redundancy.

Powering on the library

Steps to power on the library.
1. Plug the power cables into the power connectors on each module and into power outlets.

Notes:
v The library has dual redundant power supplies. To increase redundancy, plug each power cord into
a different AC power circuit.
v A power supply is required in expansion modules if drives are installed.
2. Power on the library by pressing Power on the Base Module just below the Operator Panel and hold
for 5 seconds. See “Front panel” on page 7 for the location of the Power button. When the library is
powered on, it
a. Inventories the tape cartridges in the magazines,
b. Checks the firmware version on all modules,
c. Configures the tape drives.
d. Confirms the presence of the existing modules,
e. Searches for any new modules.
f. When the library is powered on for the first time, the Initial Setup starts. See “The Initial Setup
process.”

The Initial Setup process

When you turn on the library for the first time, the Initial Setup process starts automatically. Click Next
to start the process.

52 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

The wizard guides you through setting the Internal IP range, setting library network configuration,
configuring date and time, and setting the administrator PIN. You can skip items and stop the wizard at
any time. After you configure the network settings, you can start the wizard from the Management GUI
to complete more configuration items.

Notes on navigation and entering data into the Operator Panel

v The arrow keys on the front panel are used to select numeric and alphanumeric characters and
symbols. Capital and lowercase letters, numbers, and punctuation are available to use.
v The right button under the arrows is Enter, which is pressed before you enter text.
v The left button under the arrows is Back/Return, which is used to delete entries.

See Figure 53 on page 62.

When the library starts up for the first time, the initial setup automatically begins.
1. Enter the IP address for your library. See “IP range selection” on page 33.

Figure 49. IP address selection

2. Press Enter to unlock the Operator Panel.

Note: If you wait too long to make your selection, the unit auto calibrates. The auto calibration
finishes, then returns you to the login screen.
3. When you are logged in, the initial configuration process begins with Network Settings.
4. Follow the prompts to set date and time, and administrator PIN.
5. When the initial setup is complete, the display returns to the Operator Panel main screen.

To check your configuration at any time, go to Configuration > Initial System Setup on the Operator
Panel. On the Management GUI, go to Library.

Initial configuration and customization

After the physical installation and initial setup by using the Operator Panel is completed, an
administrator can log on to the Management GUI to complete the library configuration and configuration
of any additional features.

Upon the first login with the user role: admin and password: adm001, The Initial Configuration Wizard
guides you through basic configuration settings.

The library has many features to customize it for your organization. Go to “Locating Management
functions” on page 63 to customize your library with these features.
v Enabling or disabling the I/O station.

Installing 53
 v Naming the library with the Manage Logical Library function.
v Creating or managing Logical Libraries. See “Library sharing” on page 18 for information.
| v Selecting Random or Sequential Mode. See “Random and Sequential Logical Library modes” on page
| 17 for information.
v Enabling and configuring SNMP network management.
v Setting up email event notification.
v Setting up encryption.
v Configuring date and time.
v Enabling or disabling Library Auto Clean. See “Methods of cleaning drives” on page 69.

Labeling and loading tape cartridges

The library can power on without cartridges, but needs cartridges before it can complete data read and
write operations, or any tests or operations that transfer cartridges.

Bar code labels are highly recommended in production environments to improve inventory time in the
library and ease cartridge-handling processes outside the library. See “Labeling tape cartridges” on page
153.

The I/O station

If the I/O station is enabled, you can use it to load cartridges into the library. Press the magazine button
for less than 3 seconds and after the button LED is flashing fast, pull out the I/O station.

Figure 50. Open I/O station seen from the left

Important: The lowest I/O slot of the lowest module in a library is inaccessible to the accessor, so the
I/O Station of the lowest module has four slots instead of 5.

54 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Bulk loading magazines
1. Unlock the magazine by pressing the magazine button for more than 3 seconds, wait for the button to
flash fast and then pull out the magazine.
a. From the Operator Panel or Management GUI, select the module and then select Open Magazine.
You can also press the release button on the front panel of the module to release the magazine.
b. Wait until the magazine is unlocked, and then pull out the magazine.

Note: Wait for the Operator Panel/Management GUI message to say that the magazine is
unlocked before the magazine is pulled out.

Figure 51. Magazine pulled out

2. Load the tape cartridges into the magazine.

Important: The lowest slots of the lowest module in a library are inaccessible to the accessor, so do
not load cartridges into these cartridge slots.
3. Insert the magazine into the unit.
4. Push the magazine handle slowly until the magazine release latch snaps into place. The magazine
locks into place.

Important: Push the magazine fully into place until the latch snaps into place.
5. Repeat steps 1 - 3 for each of the other magazines.

See “Accessing cartridges” on page 70.

Verifying the installation

Verify that the library has the current firmware revision, and save the configuration settings. This action
can be helpful if the library requires service.

Verify that the library has the current firmware revision. The library firmware revision is displayed at
Library > Actions > Properties.
1. Verify library firmware and update if needed: Library > Actions > Update Library Firmware
2. Run Library Verify.
3. Save the configuration settings to a file on your computer from the Management GUI: Settings >
Library > Advanced > Save Configuration File.

Installing 55
 Having a backup of the library configuration is helpful when the library is recovering from a
configuration error or needs service.

Advanced library configuration

To create and manage multiple logical libraries, utilize the advanced logical library function.

Overview
Overview of advanced features such as multipath architecture, multiple logical libraries, and multiple
control paths.

Multipath architecture

The multipath architecture feature of this tape library allows Open Systems applications to share the
robotics of the library. See “Library sharing” on page 18 for information.

The library features storage area network (SAN) ready multipath architecture. This architecture allows
homogeneous or heterogeneous Open Systems applications to share the library's robotics without
middleware or a dedicated server (host) acting as a library manager. The SAN-ready multipath
architecture makes sharing possible by partitioning the library's storage slots and tape drives into logical
libraries. Servers can then run separate applications for each logical library. This partitioning capability
extends the potential centralization of storage that the SAN enables. Partitioning also provides investment
protection if your application does not support the mixing of drive generations and media in the same
logical library.

The multipath architecture of this library is designed to provide the capability to share the library
robotics. The sharing is accomplished first by partitioning the library into multiple logical libraries (up to
the number of drives installed). Then, each logical library is assigned its own separate and distinct drives,
storage slots, and control paths. Input/output (I/O) slots are shared on a first-come-first-serve basis. This
type of partitioning is designed to allow heterogeneous applications to share the library robotics
independent of each other. Cartridges under library control are not shared between logical libraries, nor
are they allowed to be moved between logical libraries. An example of heterogeneous sharing is a
Microsoft Windows application that is using the drive and storage slots of one logical library, while a
UNIX application uses the drive and slots of another logical library. See “Mixed drives” on page 13.

Multiple logical libraries

A library can be partitioned into multiple logical libraries to enable simultaneous data backup and restore
tasks from different applications. For example, you can create multiple logical libraries so that is
processes
v Commands from Application 1 (about Department A) in Logical Library 1
v Commands from Application 2 (about Department B) in Logical Library 2
| v Commands from Application 3 (about Department C) using Sequential Mode in Logical Library 3

In this configuration, the tape drives and cartridges of each logical library are dedicated to that library
and are not shared among other libraries and subsequently other applications. Commands that are issued
| by the applications travel to the library through unique control paths or sequential mode processing by
| the library. So, the data processing for Department A is confined to the tape drives and cartridges of
Logical Library 1. Processing for Department B is confined to the tape drives and cartridges of Logical
Library 2, and so forth.

For applications that do not support mixed drive types and media within the same logical library,
partitioning the library into multiple logical libraries provides the capability to keep them separate. For
example, you can partition the following tape drives and their media into multiple and separate logical
libraries:

56 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

 v LTO 8
v LTO 7
v LTO 6

Multiple control paths

With this tape library's multipath architecture, in addition to creating multiple logical libraries, you can
configure any logical library to have more than one control path. A control path is a logical path into the
library through which the library receives standard SCSI Medium Changer commands to control the library
operations.

| Note: No SCSI Medium Changer is configured when the logical library is enabled as Sequential Mode

Multiple control paths reduce the possibility of a failure in one control path to cause the entire library to
become unavailable. Also, when you configure more control paths, more library-sharing configurations
and options are possible. Access to the library is on a first-come, first-served basis. Each control path for a
logical library can accept commands while the library is in use by another control path.

Multiple control paths for control path failover

This tape library offers an optional control path failover feature. See “Library sharing” on page 18 and
“Control path failover, Data path failover, and load balancing” on page 18.

Use of the control path failover feature further reduces the possibility of a failure in one control path to
cause the entire library to become unavailable.

The control path failover feature (feature code 1682) enables the host device driver to resend a command
to a different control path for the same logical library.

Library partitioning
Libraries that contain at least two drives can configure two logical libraries. It is possible to configure up
to 21 logical libraries in the library (up to the number of drives installed).

Partitioning of libraries

With full-height or half-height physical drives, physical numbering is bottom up for all drives. For
example, if you replace a half-height drive in Figure 22 on page 16, the drives are still numbered 1-4. If
you add a drive in any of the slots in between drives numbered 1 and 4, the physical numbering changes
and is still numbered bottom up.

Important: A full-height drive can be installed in a module in the lower two slots only.

Configuration of a 1-logical library system

A one logical library system contains all drives present in any drive positions, and it contains all the slots.

Configuration of multiple logical libraries

A library with multiple logical libraries must have a drive for each logical library and at least one slot.
Drives can be in any location in the library. It is best to have drives that are located near the slots that are
assigned to the same logical library to minimize accessor movement and maximize performance.

Installing 57
SCSI element-addressing

A logical library assigns SCSI element addresses to drives, storage slots, I/O slots, and the accessor. For
each element type (drive, storage, I/O), the SCSI element address can be viewed on the Management
GUI.

While SCSI addressing follows the same method as physical location-numbering, this action depends on
the Advanced Logical Library configuration.

Drive numbering is from bottom to top. Storage slot-numbering is from left magazine (front to back,
bottom to top) to right magazine (back to front, bottom to top). IO slot-numbering is from bottom to top.
Accessor is single number.

Note: When the number of drives in your library are reduced, update the logical library configuration.
This action removes all event notifications that indicate a drive is missing.

Updating the logical library configuration might change the SCSI element addressing.

Verifying the host connection

Procedure to verify the connection between the host computer and the library.

To verify the connections between the host computer and the library
1. Install the application software and drivers that are compatible with the library. Backup software
packages might require extra software or licensing to communicate with the robotics.
2. Verify the connection between the library and the host by using the host server’s operating system
utilities. Or, use the IBMTape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to verify the communication between library and
host. See “IBM Tape Diagnostic tool (ITDT)” on page 79.

See “Host connectivity” on page 21 for compatible servers and software.

58 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Managing
Four user roles are described, and each user role has its specific functions.
v Administrator - Admin user level The Admin role has access to all menus except those menus that are
restricted to Service only. The default password is adm001.
v Superuser - The Superuser role has access to most sections. The default password is sup001.
v Monitor - Normal user level - The Monitor role has viewing privileges to the unit, but is not able to
make configuration changes.
v Service - Service personnel user level - Access to this level is for Service personnel only. Service
personnel have access to all menus.

The Management GUI

With the Management Graphical User Interface (GUI), you can monitor, configure, and operate most
library functions from a web browser.

When possible, it is recommended that the Management GUI be used as the primary library interface.
The web interface provides access to more features, includes online help, and is easier to use.

Before the Management GUI can be used, you must log in and configure the library network settings
with the Operator Panel. This action can be done during Initial Setup. See “The Initial Setup process” on
page 52.

Logging in with the Management GUI

1. Open a supported web browser and enter the IP address of the library in the browser’s address bar.
2. Select the user level and enter the password. Click Login.

Note: For initial login, select Adminstrator and the password is adm001.

Note: Only one person (on Operator Panel or Management GUI) can be logged in to the library at a time.
Any time that you try to log in and another person is already logged in, a dialog box appears, asking if
you want to log off the other user.

The Library main screen on the Management GUI

The library main screen is organized into the following regions:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 59

Figure 52. Management GUI main screen

Table 27. Main screen elements

Element
▌1▐ Home icon > Current Navigation
▌2▐ Actions > dependent on current navigation
▌3▐ User logged in
▌4▐ Help
▌5▐ Navigation Dock
▌6▐ Overview - dependent on current navigation
▌7▐ Physical Capacity
▌8▐ Status Bar
▌9▐ Drive Activity
▌10▐ Library Status

Tips:
1. For specific management function navigation, see “Locating Management functions” on page 63.

60 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

2. Check the online help in the Management GUI for additional information. The help pages are
updated with firmware updates and often contain up-to-date technical details that might not be
contained in this document. To access Management GUI help, click the ? icon on the right side of the
Management GUI top banner.

Navigation Dock
Table 28. Navigation Dock
Navigation Dock Icons Element Additional menus
Library v Dashboard
v Modules and Magazines
v Logical Libraries
v Events
Drive Drives and Ports

Cartridges Cartridges and Slots

Access Users

Settings v Library
v Network
v Notifications
v Security

Status icons
Status icons indicate the following conditions.
Table 29. Status icons
Icon Description
The green OK icon indicates that the library is fully operational and that no
user interaction is required.

The yellow exclamation point Warning icon indicates that user attention is
necessary, but that the device can still complete most operations.

The red X Error icon indicates that user intervention is required and that the
device is not capable of completing some operations.

Managing 61
The Operator Panel
With the Operator Panel, you can monitor, configure, and operate library functions from the library front
panel.

The Operator Panel has a Power button, an LCD display, six navigation buttons, and five LEDs. To use
the Operator Panel, you must use the six navigation buttons (up/down, left/right, Enter, Back). The
Operator Panel is not a touchscreen. See “Front panel” on page 7 for the location of the navigation
buttons.

Operator Panel screens

Figure 53. Operator Panel main screen

Operator Panel main screen layout

v Left Pane - Displays the library status (firmware revision, number of modules, number of slots, number
of drives, number of errors, number of warnings.
v Center Pane - Provides access to operate, configure, and log out of the library and to view more status
information (Operation, Configuration, Maintenance, Status).
v Bottom Pane - Displays more status information (library status, time/date, IPv4, or IPv6 address). The
status pane displays one status information for 10 seconds and then switches to the next status item.
Table 30. Operator Panel menu tree
Operation Configuration Maintenance Status Logout
Move Cartridge Initial System Setup Library Tests Network Settings Logout
from Drive Date & Time View Events Library
to Home Slot Network Settings Drive Logs Drive
User Accounts Download
Reset Library Logs
Download
Drive Firmware
Upgrade
Library Firmware
Upgrade
LCD Adjustment

The Operator Panel provides a subset of menu items that are compared to the full capability of the
Management GUI. For the operations that are available on the Operator Panel, see “Locating
Management functions” on page 63.

Accessing the library with the Operator Panel

The Operator Panel can be accessed in two ways, with a PIN or without one.
1. If the Operator Panel screen saver is on, press Enter.
62 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
2. If no PIN is configured, press Enter.
3. If a PIN is configured, enter the PIN, then select Login and press Enter.

Status icons

Figure 54. Front panel LEDs

Table 31. Front panel LEDs

LEDs Color Descriptions
Ready Green Steady when power is on, flashing with tape Ready
drive or library robotic activity.
Unit ID Blue when activated The unit identification (UID) LEDs are controlled by
the user through the Maintenance > UID LED
Control screen. The UIDs on the Operator Panel and
base module back panel are activated and
deactivated together. In addition, UIDs on drives and
expansion module back panels can be activated
separately. The UIDs are helpful for locating
components of the library in a data center.
Clean Amber On, when a tape drive-cleaning operation is
recommended.
Attention Amber Flashing if the library detected a condition for which
user attention is necessary, but the library can still
complete most operations.
Error Amber On, if an unrecoverable tape drive or library error
occurs. A corresponding error message is displayed
on the LCD screen. User intervention is required as
the library is not capable of completing some
operations.

Locating Management functions

This table provides the menu navigation to assist with library setup and configuration.
Table 32. Locating Management functions
Menu Navigation
Task Operator Panel Management GUI
Advanced settings Not available with this interface Settings > Library > Advanced
Auto Calibration Not available with this interface Settings > Library > Auto Calibration
(service user)
Auto Clean Not available with this interface Library > Logical Libraries > Actions >
Manage Logical Library (Expert Mode)
See “Methods of cleaning drives” on
page 69.
Cartridge, eject from a drive Operation > Move Cartridge from Drives > Actions > Eject Cartridge
Drive to Home Slot from Drive

Managing 63
 Table 32. Locating Management functions (continued)
Menu Navigation
Task Operator Panel Management GUI
Cartridge Inventory, rescan Not available with this interface Cartridges > Actions > Inventory
Library
Cartridges, list Not available with this interface Cartridges
Cartridges, move Not available with this interface Cartridges > Actions > Move
Cartridges
Cartridges, graphical view Not available with this interface Cartridges > Actions > Graphical View
Certificates, create, backup, restore Not available with this interface Settings > Security > GUI
Cleaning, tape drive Not available with this interface Drives > Actions > Clean Drive See
“Methods of cleaning drives” on page
69.
Configuration, save and restore Not available with this interface Settings > Library > Advanced
Configuration, reset Not available with this interface Settings > Library > Advanced
Configuration file, restore Not available with this interface Settings > Library > Advanced
Configuration file, save Not available with this interface Settings > Library > Advanced
Date and time, configure Configuration > Date & Time Settings > Library > Date and Time
Diagnostics, run Demo Mode Maintenance > Library Tests Library > Actions > Tests
Diagnostics, run Library Verify Not available with this interface Library > Actions > Tests
Diagnostics, run Drive test Maintenance > Library Tests Library > Actions > Tests
Diagnostics, run Slot to Slot Not available with this interface Library > Actions > Tests
exerciser
Drive firmware, update Maintenance > Drive Firmware Drive > Actions > Update Drive
Upgrade (requires FAT32 format USB Firmware
drive)
Drives and Modules, reset the list Not available with this interface Settings > Library > Advanced
Drive status Status > Drive Drives
Drive logs, export Maintenance > Drive Logs Drives > Actions
Download (requires FAT32 format
USB drive)
Drive, modify port settings Not available with this interface Drives > Actions
Email Notification Not available with this interface Settings > Notifications
Encryption, configure Not available with this interface Settings > Security > Encryption For
LME, see “Configuring Library
Managed Encryption (KMIP)” on page
71.
Encryption Connectivity Check Not available with this interface Settings > Security > Encryption
Encryption (LME) license key, add Not available with this interface Settings > Library > Licensed Features
or delete
| Encryption, reset Not available with this interface Settings > Security > Encryption
Factory/Manufacturing reset Configuration > Reset > Full Factory Settings > Library > Advanced
Reset
Identifier light, turn On or Off Not available with this interface Library > Actions > Turn Identifier
Light On or Off
Initial Setup Configuration > Initial System Settings > Library > Initial
Setup Configuration Wizard

64 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

 Table 32. Locating Management functions (continued)
Menu Navigation
Task Operator Panel Management GUI
Inventory List Not available with this interface Cartridges
I/O Station, enable or disable Not available with this interface Library > Modules and Magazines >
Actions > Enable or Disable I/O
Station
I/O Station, open See “Accessing cartridges” on page Library > Modules and Magazines >
70. Actions > Unlock I/O Station
Kerberos Authentication, configure Not available with this interface Settings > Security > Kerberos
Authentication
LCD Adjustment Maintenance > LCD Adjustment Not available with this interface
LDAP Authentication, configure Not available with this interface Settings > Security > LDAP
Authentication
Library firmware, update Maintenance > Library Firmware Library > Actions > Update Library
Upgrade (requires FAT32 format USB Firmware
drive)
Library logs, export Maintenance > Library Logs Library > Actions > Export Library
Download (requires FAT32 format Logs
USB drive)
Library logs, view or clear Maintenance > View Event Ticket Library > Events > Actions
Logs
Library Information Status Library > Actions
Library Managed Encryption Not available with this interface Settings > Security > Encryption For
(KMIP), configure LME, see “Configuring Library
Managed Encryption (KMIP)” on page
71.
Library Verify, run Maintenance > Library Tests Library > Actions > Tests > Library
Verify
List of Known Drives and Not available with this interface Settings > Library > Advanced
Modules, reset
Logical Libraries, graphical view Not available with this interface Library > Logical Libraries > Actions >
Graphical View
Logical Libraries, Manage (Basic Not available with this interface Library > Logical Libraries > Actions >
Mode) Manage Logical Library (Basic Mode)
Logical Libraries, Manage (Expert Not available with this interface Library > Logical Libraries > Actions >
Mode) Manage Logical Library (Expert Mode)
| Logical Libraries, Mode configure Not available with this interface Library > Logical Libraries > Actions >
| Manage Logical Library (Basic Mode)
| or Manage Logical Library (Expert
| Mode) See “Random and Sequential
| Logical Library modes” on page 17.
| Logical Libraries, Mode status Not available with this interface Library > Logical Libraries
Magazines, open See “Accessing cartridges” on page Library > Modules and Magazine >
70. Actions > Unlock Magazine
Network settings Configuration > Network Settings Settings > Network > Ethernet
Notifications, configure Not available with this interface Settings > Notifications
Operator Panel, session lock Not available with this interface Settings > Security > GUI
timeout

Managing 65
 Table 32. Locating Management functions (continued)
Menu Navigation
Task Operator Panel Management GUI
Password Policy Not available with this interface Settings > Security > Password Policy
Path Failover license key, add or Not available with this interface Settings > Library > Licensed Features
delete
Port Settings, modify Not available with this interface Drives > Actions > Modify Port
Settings
Remote Logging (rsyslog), Not available with this interface Settings > Notifications > Remote
configure Logging (rsyslog)
Reset, rediscover devices Not available with this interface Settings > Library > Advanced
Reset Internal IP Range Configuration > Reset > Reset Not available with this interface
Internal IP Range
Reset Library Not available with this interface Library > Actions > Reset Library
Reset Drive Not available with this interface Drives > Actions > Reset Drive
| Sequential mode, configure Not available with this interface Library > Logical Libraries > Actions >
| Manage Logical Library (Basic Mode)
| or Manage Logical Library (Expert
| Mode) See “Random and Sequential
| Logical Library modes” on page 17.
SNMP, configure Not available with this interface Settings > Notifications > SNMP
SNTP (Simple Network Time Not available with this interface Settings > Library > Date and Time >
Protocol) Synchronization, SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)
configure Synchronization
SSL, enable or disable Not available with this interface Settings > Security > GUI > Secure
Communication
Session Timeout Not available with this Interface Settings > Security > GUI > Session
Timeout
Time Zone, set Not available with this interface Settings > Library > Date and Time >
Time Zone
Unlabeled Media, allow Not available with this interface Settings > Library > Advanced
Users, Access recovery Configuration > User Accounts Not available with this interface
Users, Modify User Passwords Not available with this interface Access > Actions > Modify User
Passwords
Users, Modify Role Permissions Not available with this interface Access > Actions > Modify Role
Permissions
Users, Modify Operator Panel PIN Configuration > User Accounts Access > Actions > Modify Operator
Panel PIN
Users, Add Not available with this interface Access > Add User
Users, Remove Not available with this interface Access > Actions

66 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Default settings
The library is set to default settings when first purchased. Many of these settings can be customized.
Table 33. Default settings
Configuration
Reset Default
Parameter Default Settings
User Accounts
“User” Monitor User = monitor NOT reset
Management GUI Password = null
“User” SuperUser User = superuser NOT reset
Management GUI Password = sup001
Administrator login User = administrator NOT reset
Management GUI Password = adm001
Service Login User = service NOT reset
Local user accounts Local Default Users = monitor, superuser, administrator, x
and service
Number of Custom User = 0
User Account Settings
Password rules Min. number of characters 8 x
Min. number of uppercase alphabetic characters 1
Min. number of lowercase alphabetic characters 1
Min. number of numeric characters 1
Min. number of special characters 0
Max. number of identical consecutive characters 2
Max. number of failed logins 3
Max. number of days before PW must be changed 90
Number of PW changes before it can be used again 3
Management GUI Restricted Disabled x
Login
Allow I/O Station/Magazine Disabled x
access by "user" monitor account
Session Locking Disabled x
Remote Authentication (LDAP) Disabled NOT reset
Configuration
Network configuration (eth0)
Host name Blank NOT reset
IP address (dhcp) NOT reset
Subnet mask (dhcp) NOT reset
Default gateway (dhcp) NOT reset
Auto Negotiate Enabled NOT reset
Speed Auto NOT reset
IPv4 Enabled NOT reset
DHCPv4 Enabled NOT reset
IPv6 NOT reset
IPv6 Prefix Enabled NOT reset
Static v6 Disabled NOT reset
IPv6 Method Disabled NOT reset

Managing 67
 Table 33. Default settings (continued)
Configuration
Reset Default
Parameter Default Settings
DHCPv6 Disabled NOT reset
DNS1 and DNS2 Configuration (dhcp) NOT reset
for IPv4
DNS1 and DNS2 Configuration Disabled NOT reset
for IPv6
Network Access Services
Primary Network Interface (eth0) Enabled NOT reset
Secondary Network Interface Disabled NOT reset
(eth1)
HTTPS Disabled NOT reset
Self Signed SSL Certificate No file NOT reset
Internal IP (eth2)
Internal network IP IP Range defined with Operator Panel NOT reset
I/O Station/Magazine
I/O Station Enabled x
I/O Station/Magazines Allow Disabled x
Monitor "User" access
| Logical Libraries Disabled All Logical
| libraries are
| deleted
NTP/SNTP Setting Disabled NOT reset
Date Blank or existing NOT reset
Time Blank or existing NOT reset
Time Zone GMT NOT reset
| Sequential Mode Disabled x
Email Notifications (SMTP) Disabled x
SNMP
SNMP v1, v2 Disabled x
Licensed Features (need license key for enablement)
Encryption KMIP Disabled NOT reset
Path Failover Disabled NOT reset
SCSI Defaults
Product Name - Marketing TS4300 x
Name
Library Product ID - INQUIRY 3573-TL x
Product ID String
Library Vendor ID - INQUIRY IBM x
Vendor ID String

68 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Table 33. Default settings (continued)
Configuration
Reset Default
Parameter Default Settings
SCSI element addressing Starting element addresses x
in decimal:
Slot = 1001
Drives = 1
I/E Elements = 101

Values in hex are:

Slot = 0x3E9
Drives = 0x1
I/E Elements = 0x65
Miscellaneous settings
Barcode format returned to host Align left x
Barcode length returned to host Eight leftmost characters x
Language settings English NOT reset
Auto Clean Disabled x
Media Barcode Compatibility Enabled x
Check
Empty Slot/Unlabeled Cartridge Enabled x
Detection
Management GUI Timeout 30 minutes x
Drive Defaults
Drive speed and topology Automatic/Automatic x
settings
Odometer Enabled NOT reset

Methods of cleaning drives

Automatic cleaning of tape drives is disabled by default in the library. However, automatic cleaning of
tape drives is recommended for this library. It is also possible to initiate manual or host cleaning
methods.

The head of every tape drive in the tape library must be kept clean to prevent errors that are caused by
contamination. To help you keep the drives clean, IBM provides a cleaning cartridge with the library. The
library uses the cleaning cartridge to clean the drive with whatever cleaning method that you choose. In
all methods, cleaning is done after the data cartridge is unloaded from the drive and before the next load.

It is the operator’s responsibility to monitor cleaning cartridge usage and replace cleaning cartridges as
necessary. This tape library provides multiple ways to monitor and manage cleaning cartridges. If SNMP
traps are enabled, a trap is generated when a cleaning cartridge expires. It is also possible to use the
Management GUI to monitor the cleaning cycles that remain on a cleaning cartridge and to the enable a
setting that automatically ejects expired cleaning cartridges.

Three methods of cleaning are available.

Automatic cleaning
Automatic cleaning enables the library to automatically respond to any tape drive's request for
cleaning and to begin the cleaning process. The cleaning process is transparent to any host
application that uses the library.

Managing 69
 Select Auto Clean to enable the auto cleaning feature. When enabled, the library automatically
initiates a cleaning operation when media is unloaded from a drive that requires cleaning instead
of creating a warning event when a drive requires cleaning. For reliable operation, enable Auto
Clean for each logical library and ensure that the library has a valid cleaning cartridge.
When a cleaning operation is initiated, the library first attempts to use an unexpired cleaning
cartridge from the same logical library as the tape drive. If the logical library does not contain an
unexpired cleaning cartridge, the library attempts to use an unexpired cleaning cartridge from a
storage slot that is not assigned to a logical library. The library does not use a cleaning cartridge
from a different logical library. When auto cleaning is enabled, ensure that each logical library has
an unexpired cleaning cartridge. Or, place at least one unexpired cleaning cartridge in a storage
slot that is not assigned to a logical library.
After the initial configuration, Auto Clean can be turned on or off by accessing the Logical
Library Wizard Expert Mode.
1. Go to Library > Logical Libraries > Actions > Manage Logical Library (Expert Mode).
2. Select the logical library, then click Edit.
3. Click Next to go to the General Settings screen.
4. Check or clear Auto Clean, then click Next on the subsequent screens.
5. If a change was made, click Finish and the Logical Libraries are reconfigured. If no changes
were made, click Cancel.

Note: IBM recommends enabling the Auto Clean function on the library. With the Auto Clean
function enabled, drive cleaning occurs automatically. The only time Auto Cleaning must be
disabled is when your backup application requires that it has control.
Manual cleaning
Manual cleaning requires that you select a menu option from the Management GUI to clean one
or more of the tape drives. Manual cleaning is always supported.
Host cleaning
Host cleaning enables the backup application to define and control the cleaning process.
Automatic and manual cleaning use the CLNxxx VOLSER.

Note: For tape cartridge information, see “Supported tape cartridges” on page 16.

Accessing cartridges
Each magazine has a button that provides an easy way to open a magazine.

See “Front panel” on page 7.

Each module can be configured to have a portion of the right magazine that is designated as an I/O
station or this option can be disabled. To open the I/O station, press the magazine button for less than 3
seconds. To open the entire magazine, press the magazine button for more than 3 seconds.

Notes:
1. If a magazine is opened, no other magazines or I/O stations can be opened.
2. If during the magazine open process the magazine is not opened within 30 seconds, the magazine
locks.
3. The user must pull out the magazine, as the magazine does not eject.

The LED also provides an indicator of the current state of that magazine.

70 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

 Table 34. Magazine state
Magazine state LED state Description
Closed Steady ON I/O station is enabled.
Closed Slow Flash Magazine open is in process.
Closed Fast Flash Magazine is opened.
Closed OFF I/O station is not enabled.
Opened OFF Magazine is opened.

Configuring Library Managed Encryption (KMIP)

With the Key Management Interoperability Protocol (KMIP) wizard, you can configure the use of KMIP
key management servers with the library.

Access the wizard from the Actions menu with the Manage Encryption option.

Notes: Before you run the Encryption wizard

v Confirm that the Library-Managed Encryption (KMIP) license is activated on the Settings > Library >
Licensed Features page.
v Verify that the KMIP server is available on the network and is configured for use with this library. For
information on configuring KMIP servers for use with the library, see the KMIP server documentation.

Note: If you plan to use the IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager (SKLM), go to “Related Publications”
on page xxv for information on setup and configuration.
| v If Library Encryption settings are cleared and reconfigured, you're required to accept the new
| certificate on the KMIP server when the Library Self-Signed Certificate is used.

KMIP wizard configuration

1. In the Actions menu, click Manage Encryption to start the wizard.
2. The Wizard Information screen displays information about the wizard. On this screen, it’s also
| possible to Reset Encryption Settings. If the library configuration is complete and the KMIP server is
available on the network, click Next.
3. The Certificate Option screen displays the different certificate options that can be used to establish a
secure communication to the KMIP server. You can select from the following options:
v Library Self-Signed Certificate (default option) - A self-signed certificate that is generated by the
library is used.
v Uploaded Certificate - Upload a PCKS #12 file that includes a certificate and corresponding key.
v Generate Certificate Request (CSR) - A CSR is generated by the library that must be signed by a
CA server. This method requires a CA certificate that must be provided during the wizard steps.
a. Certification Configuration
– Library Self-Signed Certificate – skip to the next step.
– Uploaded Certificate
1) Upload the PKCS #12 file in the certificate area on the Certificate Option screen.
2) If this file requires a password, it must be provided in the Certificate Password input
field. If no password, the field can be left empty.
3) After successfully upload of the certificate, click Next.
– Generate Certificate Request (CSR)
1) The Certificate Authority Information screen displays prerequisites for using the KMIP
certificate. When the prerequisites are met, click Next.

Managing 71
 2) The Certificate Authority Certificate Entry screen displays instructions for obtaining the
CA certificate for the KMIP server. Follow the instructions to copy the CA certificate from
the management console. Paste the CA certificate into the wizard and then click Next.
3) The Library Certificate Information screen displays information about the next wizard
steps. Click Next.
b. The KMIP Client Configuration screen provides options for two types of server authentication.
– If your KMIP server uses a client user name and password for authentication, enter the user
name and password that were specified on the KMIP management console for the library.
– If your KMIP server uses only certificate validation for authentication, select Enable KMIP
Certificate only authentication. Select this option only if you’re using a KMIP server that
doesn’t support a client user name and password. This default method is used when KMIP is
used with the IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager.
1) In the KMIP Server Configuration screen, enter the IP address or fully qualified host
name and port number for up to ten KMIP servers.
2) To verify access to the KMIP servers, click Connectivity Check.
3) Check at the KMIP server side that the server accepts the certificate of the library.
4) The Setup Summary screen displays the settings that are collected by the wizard. Verify
that the settings are correct and that no errors are in the Done column.
- If you need to modify any settings or fix any issues, either click Back to reach the
applicable screen or Cancel to leave the wizard to fix the issues and return later.
- If the settings are correct and no errors are reported, click Finish.

When the wizard finishes, the Library Managed Encryption (KMIP) encryption mode is selectable in the
Logical Library Wizard (Expert Mode) on the Library > Logical Libraries page.

72 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Troubleshooting
Use the information in this section to troubleshoot any issues with your library setup and configuration.

Attention: This library is designed to operate when installed in a rack with the rack rail kit or on a
tabletop. Operating the library without installing it correctly in the rails might cause errors. Placing any
weight on top of the library might also cause errors. Expanded library configurations on tabletops are not
supported.

Finding event information

You can find event information by viewing the library log files and downloading support tickets.

You can find event information by viewing log files from the Library > Events screen or downloading
support tickets from the Drives > Actions > Export Drive Logs screen.

See “Locating Management functions” on page 63.

Identifying a failed component

Follow the procedures to identify a failing component.
1. Management GUI: Activate the UID LEDs from the Library > Actions > Turn Identifier Light On or
Off screen. This action illuminates the blue LED on the front and rear of the Base Module to identify
the library that contains the failed module or component.
2. Identify the module within the library that contains the failed component.
a. In the upper left of the Home screen, locate the module that indicates an error.
b. Click or tap the module for information on the failed component.

Running library tests

The library provides tests to verify library operations.
v On the Management GUI, go to Library > Actions > Tests and choose the library test that you want to
run.
– Library Verify
– Demo Mode
– Drive Test
– Slot to Slot Exerciser
v On the Operator Panel, go to Maintenance > Library Tests to run tests from the Operator Panel.
– Demo Mode
– Drive Diagnostics

Troubleshooting Guide
Refer to this table of symptoms or errors that might occur with the tape library and the installed tape
drives.

The table provides actions to correct the problems. If replacement parts are needed, go to Appendix C,
“Replacement parts,” on page 169. See “Contacting IBM technical support” on page 78.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 73

Table 35. Resolving errors
Problem Solution
Event code/Attention information on Management GUI or Library
Event code that is shown on v Look up the error code. See Event Codes.
Event Ticket on the
v Try to resolve the failure.
Management GUI. See “Finding
event information” on page 73. v If necessary, power cycle the library.
Failure/Attention Indication on Review tickets on the Check Event Ticket Log on Management GUI.
Operator Panel display.
Attention LED is lit on the front Review tickets on the Check Event Ticket Log on Management GUI.
or the rear of the Base Module.
Failure/Attention Indication on Tap the icon to see information about the event.
Management GUI Library
Dashboard
Attention LED and Cleaning This problem is likely caused by a drive that requires cleaning.
LED are lit. v Check Event Ticket Log on Management GUI.
Single Character Display (SCD) 1. Review tickets on the Check Event Ticket Log on Management GUI.
is shown on drive.
2. Use SCD. See Drive Single Character Display.
The Attention LED is lit but the The library was unable to complete the requested operation with the selected tape
Cleaning LED isn’t lit after a cartridge.
cartridge load. v Use cartridges that are compatible with the drive type.
v Use the correct type of cartridges for the operation. For example, use a cleaning
cartridge for cleaning.
v Make sure that you’re using a Universal cleaning cartridge.
The Cleaning LED is lit after a The cleaning cartridge is expired. (A cleaning cartridge expires after 50 cleaning
cleaning cartridge was used. cycles).
v Replace the cleaning cartridge.
A particular cartridge sets off Retry the operation with a different cartridge.
the Attention LED and possibly
the Cleaning LED. If the Attention LED is cleared, and then immediately redisplays each time that a
particular cartridge is reloaded, that cartridge must be suspected as defective.
v Export the cartridge and load a known good cartridge. In some cases, a
cartridge can be worn out, the memory is defective, or was formatted as a
Firmware Upgrade cartridge.
v Any cartridge that is suspected of being defective or contaminated must NOT
be reused in any drive.
v If the bad cartridge is a cleaning cartridge, it might be expired.
Event Notification on Host, SNMP, or Email
Host receives error message. v Use ITDT. See “IBM Tape Diagnostic tool (ITDT)” on page 79.
v Use Sense Data. See “Sense data” on page 104.
SNMP Monitoring system Check Event Ticket Log on Management GUI.
receives trap.
Event is received by email Check Event Ticket Log on Management GUI.
notification.
Cartridge Movement Problems

74 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Table 35. Resolving errors (continued)
Problem Solution
Tape is stuck in drive. Try the following steps, in this order, to remove the stuck tape.
Note: The tape drive must rewind the tape before it’s ejected. This procedure can
take up to ten minutes or more, depending on how much tape must be rewound.
When the tape is rewound, the eject cycle takes fewer than 16 seconds.

The Ready light flashes while the tape rewinds. Wait for the tape to finish
rewinding before another operation is attempted.
1. Stop all Host Activity.
2. Attempt to unload or move the cartridge to a slot.
3. Power down the library, disconnect the cable from the drive, power on the
library, and wait until the tape drive is idle or ready. Attempt to Move
Cartridge to Slot.
4. Attempt a Eject Cartridge from Drive as an emergency unload operation.
Important: Inspect the tape cartridge that was stuck. Damage or misplaced labels
on the cartridge might cause the load/unload failure. Discard any tape cartridge
that is found to have issues.
Cartridge can’t be removed 1. Unlock the magazine and extend it to access the storage slot.
from storage slot.
2. Grasp the cartridge and remove it from the storage slot. Some tapes need to be
inserted and removed several times to condition them for free movement in
and out of the magazine.
3. Check the bar code label and verify that it’s secure to the cartridge.
4. Check the cartridge for damage.
Other Library Problems
Device doesn’t power on. v Check all power cord connections.
v Check the LEDs on the power supplies.
v Make sure that Power on the front panel was pressed, and the green Ready
LED is lit.
v Make sure that the outlet has power. Try another working outlet.
v Replace the power cord.
No message appears on the v Check all power cord connections.
Operator Panel display.
v Check the LEDs on the power supplies.
v Make sure that Power on the front panel was pressed, and the green Ready
LED is lit.
v Make sure that the outlet has power. Try another working outlet.
Can’t load the cleaning v Make sure that you’re using an LTO cleaning cartridge.
cartridge.
v Make sure that the cleaning cartridge isn’t expired. A cleaning cartridge expires
after 50 cleaning cycles.
User account locked. From the Configuration > User Accounts > Access Recovery page, you can
receive a temporary administrator password for login to the Management GUI
that is valid for two hours.
Tape Drive or Media Problems

Troubleshooting 75
Table 35. Resolving errors (continued)
Problem Solution
Can’t write to or read from v Make sure that the cartridge isn’t a WORM cartridge that was already used.
tape.
v Make sure that the cartridge is write enabled (move the write-protect switch to
the enabled position).
v Make sure that the data cartridge is compatible with the drive model. See
“Supported tape cartridges” on page 16.
v Make sure that you’re using an LTO cartridge that isn’t degaussed.
CAUTION:
Don’t degauss LTO cartridges!
v Make sure that the cartridge wasn’t exposed to harsh environmental or
electrical conditions and isn’t physically damaged in any way.
v Many backup applications don’t read or write to cartridges that were created
with a different backup application. In this case, you might need to run an
erase, format, or label operation on the cartridge.
v Make sure that you understand any data protection or overwrite protection
schemes that your backup application might be using, which might prevent you
from writing to a specific cartridge.
v Retry the operation with a different, known good tape.
v Clean the tape drive.
A cartridge that is recently Media that is moved from one environment to another can cause issues until it
imported from a different acclimates to the new conditions. A cartridge must be acclimated for at least 24
environment is causing issues. hours before it’s used, particularly if it was stored at a substantially different
temperature or level of humidity than the device.
The library displays incorrect v Verify that the label is properly applied.
bar codes.
v Verify that the label isn’t soiled.
Cleaning or data cartridge v Check the event log to see which cartridge is incompatible.
incompatible with drive.
v Make sure that you’re using data and cleaning cartridges that are compatible
with the drive and model of your device.
v Make sure that you’re using the correct cartridge type for the operation. The
device automatically unloads incompatible cartridges, and the Attention LED
flashes.
v Export the media.
Connection Problems
Fibre Channel connection Check Drive Status screen to check the link connection for your tape drive.
problems v For each available port, run a drive Wrap Test.
1. Unplug the Fibre Channel cable, then plug in the Fibre Channel wrap tool.
2. Go to Library > Actions > Tests > Drive test and run the Fibre Channel
wrap test.
3. If the drive test fails, follow the “Pre-call checklist” on page 77.
4. If the FC Wrap Test passes, continue with the next steps.
v Check that the Fibre Channel speed is set to either match the HBA/switch
speed or set to Automatic
v Verify that cables aren’t damaged.
v Verify that cables are securely connected on both ends.
v Verify Host Connectivity.
v Use ITDT to debug the problem.

76 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

 Table 35. Resolving errors (continued)
Problem Solution
SAS connection problems Check Drive Status screen to check the connection for your tape drive.
v For each available port, run a drive Wrap Test.
1. Unplug the SAS cable, then plug in the SAS wrap tool.
2. Go to Library > Actions > Tests > Drive test and run the SAS wrap test.
3. If the drive test fails, follow the “Pre-call checklist.”
4. If the SAS Wrap Test passes, continue with the next steps.
v Verify that cables aren’t damaged.
v Verify that cables are securely connected on both ends.
v Verify Host Connectivity.
v Use ITDT to debug the problem.
Can’t connect to the v Verify that the Ethernet cable is connected to the Base Module’s controller card
Management GUI. and to the LAN.
v Verify that the link LED on the RJ45 (LAN) connector is lit when the device is
turned on. If the LED isn’t lit, the device isn’t communicating with the LAN.
See your network administrator for help.
v Verify that the device is configured with a valid static network address or
DHCP is enabled so the device can obtain a network address. If DHCP is used,
write down the device's network address from the Operator Panel login screen.
If a valid DHCP address isn’t available, the library isn’t communicating with
the DHCP server. See your network administrator for help.
v Enter the library’s IP address into the address bar of a web browser that is
connected to the same LAN as the device. If the Management GUI page doesn’t
display, ping the device's IP address. If the ping fails, check that no firewalls or
other obstructions to network traffic exist between the computer with the web
browser and the device. See your network administrator for help.

| Can’t connect to Key v Run the Encryption Connectivity Check and review the results message. See
| Management Server for LME. “Locating Management functions” on page 63.
| v Validate that the KMIP server configuration properties file includes support for
| TLS 1.2. See the KMIP server documentation.
| v If SKLM v2.7 or higher is used and you’re using the Library Self-Signed
| Certificate. For one time only, you might need to reset your encryption settings
| to clear out old versions of the self-signed certificate, reconfigure encryption,
| then accept the new self-signed certificate on the SKLM server. See
| “Configuring Library Managed Encryption (KMIP)” on page 71.
| v Check that your certificate algorithm is supported by your version of the KMIP
| server.

Pre-call checklist
If you have questions or problems with the library, complete these steps before a call to IBM technical
support is placed.

Note: Where instructions refer you to the web, go to [Link]

1. Verify that you exhausted all troubleshooting options. See “Troubleshooting Guide” on page 73.
2. Collect library and drive logs. See “Locating Management functions” on page 63.
3. Verify that the library and drive firmware is at the most recent level. See “Locating Management
functions” on page 63.
4. Verify that your device drivers are at the most recent level.
v For the current release of IBMdevice drivers, see Supported Device Drivers.

Troubleshooting 77
 v For the current release of device drivers by independent software vendors (ISVs), go to the
appropriate third-party website.
5. Verify whether your hardware and software configuration is supported. See “Host connectivity” on
page 21.
6. Complete a general checkup of the hardware and connections:
v Ensure that the host interface cable connector does not contain bent or recessed pins.
v Ensure that all retention screws for the host interface cable and terminator are securely tightened.
v Verify the host connection. See “Verifying the host connection” on page 58.
If you still have a problem after these steps are completed, see “Contacting IBM technical support.”

Contacting IBM technical support

Follow the procedures to contact IBM technical support.

Important: This tape library is a customer installed unit. The customer is responsible for the setup and
maintenance of the tape library. The customer is charged for service if a service contract is not in place.
v Complete the steps in Pre-call checklist before a call is placed to IBM technical support.
v Before IBM technical support is called, the customer is responsible for following IBM's published LTO
diagnostic procedures, including any needed update to the current level of firmware.
v The IBM Support Center assists with problem determination and can initiate shipment of a
replacement part, if needed, to the customer’s location. Transportation costs, both ways, are paid by
IBM. The replacement part becomes the property of the customer in exchange for the failed part, which
becomes the property of IBM. The customer is responsible for packing the failed part into the shipping
carton that contained the replacement part. Failure to return the failed part to IBM within 30 days
results in a bill sent to the customer for the new list price. The customer is responsible for installing
and setting up all replacement parts.
v Failure to use the carton in which the replacement part was received, or failure to properly pack the
returned part, can result in charges that are incurred for damage to the failed part during shipment.
v Before you call technical support, follow these steps that help you take full advantage of your call.
1. Be prepared to provide
– Machine type and Model name
– Serial number of the library
– Hardware configuration, including firmware versions, drive types, modules
– Type of host, operating system version, device driver information, software application, and
version, clock speed, RAM, network type, network version
– A brief description of the problem, including Event Ticket information. See “Finding event
information” on page 73.
2. Review all documentation carefully. (Experience demonstrates that most questions are answered in
your documentation).
3. Be prepared to explain whether the software or hardware worked properly any time in the past.
Have you changed anything recently?
4. Pinpoint the exact location of your problem, if possible. Note the steps that led to the problem. Can
you duplicate the problem or is it a one-time occurrence?
5. Note any host error messages displayed. Write down the exact error message.
6. If at all possible, call while at your computer, with the library installed and turned on.
v The IBM Support Center assists with problem determination and initiates shipment of a replacement
part, if needed, to your location. To contact IBM technical support:
– In the US: 1-800-IBM_SERV (1-800-426-7378).

78 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

 – All other Countries/Regions: [Link]
– To open a Service Request online: Under Support & downloads, click Open a Service Request.

Diagnostic information
This section provides various diagnostic tools and information.

IBM Tape Diagnostic tool (ITDT)

ITDT has multiple functional capabilities and is a quick, convenient, and efficient method for drive
firmware updates. As a note, drive memory dump retrievals are completed by the tool as well.

The IBM Tape Diagnostic tool (ITDT):

v Runs quick or extended diagnostic tests on tape drives. If the library is online to the server/host where
the tool resides, ITDT communicates with the drive through the library to load and unload a test
cartridge, exercising some library functions.
v Retrieves firmware memory dumps from tape drives and libraries.
v Completes a firmware update on tape drives or libraries. See note about library firmware update.
v Tests the performance of the environment by completely writing a cartridge and measuring
performance.
v Retrieves and displays cartridge information.
v Verifies the encryption environment.
v Does not require special device drivers.
v Is available for most major platforms.
v Scans the host interface and finds and displays for selection all IBM LTO devices. The tool does not
display non-IBM devices.

The IBM Tape Diagnostic tool (ITDT) is available as a command line utility and a graphical user interface
(GUI) version.
v The IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) is started by entering the executable file from the directory
where the tool is located. The Help feature gives a brief explanation of each function and shows the
syntax.

Note: Be sure that you have the most current version of ITDT if you are updating firmware on a recent
drive type. Before ITDT is used, verify that your library host operating system is at the current released
level. This action ensures optimum read/write operations for diagnostic tests.

IBM maintains the current levels of ITDT on the web. Go to [Link]

and follow these steps to access this material.
1. From the Fix Central web page, choose the Select Product tab, select System Storage from the
Product Group list.
2. Select Tape Systems from the System Storage list.
3. Select Tape drivers and software from the Tape systems list.
4. Select IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool ITDT from the Tape drivers and software list.
5. Select the appropriate operating system from the Platform list and click Continue.
6. Select the appropriate version from the list.

Additional information about the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) is included in the IBM® Tape Device
Drivers Installation and User's Guide, and can be found on the web at [Link]
[Link]?rs=577&uid=ssg1S7002972.

Troubleshooting 79
 Event codes
Events are used in the library Ticket and Event system to store all types of events with a unique event
code and event description.

Event Reporting System

These event codes are shown on the user interfaces as the resulting code for any type of event at the
highest level of information. No internal error code is shown at this level.

Events are sent by the library to different recipients like SNMP targets or email notification. These events
have a common structure and unique codes for every type of event.

The event code system is used for the following events:

| v Error event (2XXX)
| v Warning event (4XXX)
| v Configuration event (8XXX)
| v Informational event (9XXX)

Event code structure

Example event code
Event: 2057 - Robotics shipping lock in incorrect position

The event log with the library also includes a date and time stamp for each event. Press the associated
time stamp to see the event code and a description of the event. The date and time format can be
changed in the Date/Time Format section in the Management GUI.
v [Link]
v [Link]
v [Link]
The time format can be set for 12 hours or 24 hours.
v 12 hour: [Link] am/pm
v 24 hour: [Link]

Where
v yyyy is the year.
v mm is the month.
v dd is the current day.
v hh is hours.
v mm is minutes.
v ss is seconds.

Resolving an error code

1. Record the error information that is displayed on the Operator Panel display or Management GUI
screen.
2. If possible, cycle library power and retry the operation.
v If the error does not recur, run Library Verify before normal library operation is continued.
3. If the error recurs, click the event to see its details. If available, click Troubleshooting on the Event
Ticket Details screen to get suggestions on how to fix the error. Click OK to close the Event Ticket
Details screen.

80 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

4. When the proposed solution is applied, run Library Verify before normal library operation is
continued.

Complete the steps in “Resolving an error code” on page 80 before you complete the User Action that is
listed in the various Event Codes.

Main error events

Table 36. Main error events
Event Code Message Text and Description Details and Solution
2000 Move Cartridge failed. Verify the source and destination elements and retry the move
operation.
2002 The initial module discovery Ensure that all modules are powered and have the
(detection of expansion interconnection cables properly attached. Also, ensure that the
modules) failed. module alignment locks (at the rear of module) are in the correct
positions.
2003 The library’s temperature Check to ensure that
exceeded the critical 1. The drive cover plates are installed where no drive exists.
temperature threshold.
2. All power supplies are installed.
3. The ambient room temperature is within limits.
2004 The Library Startup process v Verify that magazines are closed, cartridges are fully seated,
failed. and that no accessor obstructions exist.
v Verify that all modules are powered and any expansion
modules are cabled correctly with the interconnect cable.
v Verify that a top and bottom cover is properly installed on the
library.
v Verify that the module alignment locks (at rear of module) are
in the proper position.
v If the accessor moves front to back, but not vertically, the
accessor shipping lock might be positioned incorrectly and
must be moved to either the fully locked or fully unlocked
position.
v If the error persists, review library events for information or
restart the library.
2005 Cable to accessor is broken. Ensure that the spooling cable is fully seated in the base module
and connected correctly to the accessor assembly.

Troubleshooting 81
Table 36. Main error events (continued)
Event Code Message Text and Description Details and Solution
2009 Library test failed due to v Review test requirements and retry the test.
accessor problem.
v If the test continues to fail check for accessor obstructions or
other accessor problems.
v For proper operation, the accessor must be able to reach the
bottom of the library. Verify that no obstructions are at the
bottom of the library or on the bottom cover of the library in
the path of the accessor.
1. To check for obstructions at the bottom of the library, first
power off the library by pressing Power for 5 seconds and
select the Default Park location.
2. When the library is powered off, remove the left magazine of
the lowest library module, and verify that the entire area of
the bottom cover is free of any objects that might obstruct the
accessor's path.
3. After any obstructions are cleared, replace the magazine,
power the library on, and after the library finishes
initialization and inventory, verify that no further critical
events were generated.
2010 Library test failed due to Ensure that the spooling mechanism is fully seated in the base
spooling mechanism defect. module and installed correctly to the accessor assembly.
2012 Multiple bottom covers Remove all bottom covers except for the bottom module in the
detected. library.
2013 Multiple top covers detected. Remove all top covers except for the top module in the library.
2014 Bottom cover is missing. Install the bottom cover on the bottom module of the library,
also check the module interconnect cabling and module power
cabling. If the base module can’t detect both a top and bottom
cover, the accessor doesn’t move.
2015 Top cover is missing. Install the top cover on the top module of the library. Also,
check the module interconnect cabling and module power
cabling. If the base module can’t detect both a top and bottom
cover, the accessor doesn’t move.
2016 Unit to unit not locked. Ensure that the alignment mechanism is engaged in every
module that is above another module in the library.
2017 Communication errors during v Ensure that all modules are powered and have the
stack discover process. interconnect cable properly attached.
v Ensure that the module alignment locks (at the rear of
module) are in the correct positions.
2021 Database access error. Restore a configuration backup and run a power cycle.
2022 Drive was hot-removed. Reinsert the removed drive at the same position as it was
removed.
2023 Internal Software error. Check for a new system Software version for upgrade.
2024 Unhandled Exception Check for a new system Software version for upgrade.

82 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Table 36. Main error events (continued)
Event Code Message Text and Description Details and Solution
2027 Move failed pulling cartridge v Check for labels or cartridge misalignments that can prevent
from slot. the cartridge from coming out of the slot or drive.
v For proper operation, the accessor must be able to reach the
bottom of the library. Verify that no obstructions exist at the
bottom of the library or on the bottom cover of the library in
the path of the accessor.
1. To check for obstructions at the bottom of the library, first
power off the library by pressing Power for 5 seconds and
select the Default Park location.
2. When the library is powered off, remove the left magazine of
the lowest library module, and verify that the entire area of
the bottom cover is free of any objects that might obstruct the
accessor's path.
3. After obstructions are cleared, replace the magazine, power
the library on, and after the library finishes initialization and
inventory, verify that no further critical events were
generated.
2028 Move failed inserting cartridge v Check for labels or cartridge misalignments that can prevent
to slot. the cartridge from coming out of the slot or drive.
v For proper operation, the accessor must be able to reach the
bottom of the library. Verify that no obstructions exist at the
bottom of the library or on the bottom cover of the library in
the path of the accessor.
1. To check for obstructions at the bottom of the library, first
power off the library by pressing Power for 5 seconds and
select the Default Park location.
2. When the library is powered off, remove the left magazine of
the lowest library module, and verify that the entire area of
the bottom cover is free of any objects that might obstruct the
accessor's path.
3. After obstructions are cleared, replace the magazine, power
the library on, and after the library finishes initialization and
inventory, verify that no further critical events were
generated.
2029 Initialization failure due to 1. Check for obstructions in the pathway of the accessor such as
accessor front to back a cartridge that is sticking out.
positioning error.
2. Verify the module alignment and frame alignment. Check
whether the accessor is stuck in lock mechanism.
3. Move the accessor apart from lock mechanism and enable
lock mechanism correctly.
2032 Initialization failure due to Check for obstructions in the vertical pathway of the accessor,
accessor rotation positioning such as a cartridge that is sitting in the shuttle of the accessor or
error. any other impedance to accessor movement.

Troubleshooting 83
Table 36. Main error events (continued)
Event Code Message Text and Description Details and Solution
2033 Initialization failure due to v Check for obstructions in the vertical pathway of the accessor
accessor vertical positioning such as a cartridge sticking out.
error.
v For proper operation, the accessor must be able to reach the
bottom of the library. Verify that no obstructions exist at the
bottom of the library or on the bottom cover of the library in
the path of the accessor.
1. To check for obstructions at the bottom of the library, first
power off the library by pressing Power for 5 seconds and
select the Default Park location.
2. When the library is powered off, remove the left magazine of
the lowest library module, and verify that the entire area of
the bottom cover is free of any objects that might obstruct the
accessor's path.
3. After obstructions are cleared, replace the magazine, power
the library on, and after the library finishes initialization and
inventory, verify that no further critical events were
generated.
2034 Cable to spooling mechanism is Ensure that the spooling mechanism is fully seated in the base
broken during initialization. module and connected correctly to the accessor.
2035 Initialization failure due to Check for obstructions in the vertical pathway of the accessor,
accessor gripper positioning such as a cartridge that is sitting in the shuttle of the accessor or
error. any other impedance to accessor movement.
2036 Unintended process termination. Restart or power cycle system.
2037 Accessor firmware version Restart or power cycle system.
upgrade failed.
2038 Lost connection to Module. v Ensure that all modules are powered and have the
interconnect cable properly attached.
v Restart or power cycle the system.
2039 Cartridge was left in accessor v Enable I/O station and ensure that empty slots are available
gripper, unable to be moved to in the I/O station.
any open location.
v Power-cycle the library.
v If still failing, open covers and remove the cartridge manually
from gripper.
2040 Library Verify test failed with An unidentified failure occurred. Contact your IBM service
critical error. representative.
2041 Library Verify test failed Ensure that the alignment mechanism is engaged in every
because of unit lock failed. module that is above another module in the library.
2042 Library Verify test failed v Install the top cover on the top module of the library.
because top cover is missing.
v Check the module interconnect cabling and module power
cabling.
v If the base module can’t detect both a top and bottom cover,
the accessor doesn’t move.
2043 Library Verify test failed v Install the bottom cover on the bottom module of the library.
because bottom cover is
v Check the module interconnect cabling and module power
missing.
cabling.
v If the base module can’t detect both a top and bottom cover,
the accessor doesn’t move.

84 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Table 36. Main error events (continued)
Event Code Message Text and Description Details and Solution
2045 Library Verify test failed The minimum requirements for the Library Verify are at least
because move media test failed. one unloaded drive and one data cartridge that is compatible
with that unloaded drive that is installed in the library. If no
drives are unloaded or no compatible media is found, the test
fails and an error event is generated.
v To view event details from Management GUI, click the event,
and then view all of the event details to see what elements
were involved in the move failure.
v Check for obstructions in the pathway of the accessor such as
a cartridge that is sticking out.
v Verify module alignment and frame alignment.
v Check if accessor is stuck in lock mechanism, move the
accessor apart from lock mechanism and enable lock
mechanism correctly.
2046 Library Verify test failed v Remove and reseat the drive canister to ensure that the drive
because drive communication is fully seated.
test failed.
v If the issue persists, reset the drive.
v Use the library Management GUI to pull a drive support
ticket and check the device analysis section for help (HPE
Library and Tape Tools must be installed to view support
ticket).
2047 Library Verify test failed v Verify that no obstruction is in front of the bar code scanning
because the bar code scanning module on the cartridge table on the accessor.
test failed.
v If the error persists replace the accessor.
v For proper operation, the accessor must be able to reach the
bottom of the library. Verify that no obstructions are at the
bottom of the library or on the bottom cover of the library in
the path of the accessor.
1. To check for obstructions at the bottom of the library, first
power off the library by pressing Power for 5 seconds and
select the Default Park location.
2. When the library is powered off, remove the left magazine of
the lowest library module, and verify that the entire area of
the bottom cover is free of any objects that might obstruct the
accessor's path.
3. After obstructions are cleared, replace the magazine, power
the library on, and after the library finishes initialization and
inventory, verify that no further critical events were
generated.
2052 An open magazine was detected Ensure that all magazines are inserted and properly locked.
in one or more modules. Don’t open magazines by using the emergency release while the
library is operating and the accessor is moving.
2053 An open top cover was Ensure that the top cover is inserted and properly locked. Don’t
detected. open top cover by using the emergency release while the library
is operating and the accessor is moving.
2054 An open bottom cover was Ensure that the bottom cover is inserted and properly locked.
detected. Don’t open bottom cover by using the emergency release while
the library is operating and the accessor is moving.
2055 An open unit lock was detected. Ensure that all unit locks are properly locked. Don’t open unit
locks by using the emergency release while the library is
operating and the accessor is moving.

Troubleshooting 85
Table 36. Main error events (continued)
Event Code Message Text and Description Details and Solution
2056 Initialization failure due to Check for obstructions in the horizontal pathway of the accessor
picker push pull positioning such as a cartridge that is sticking out or a cable that is
error. impeding progress.
2057 Startup failure due to shipping 1. Get access to the picker assembly and manually move the
lock in incorrect position. shipping lock lever to either locked or unlocked position.
2. After the shipping lock is moved to the one of the correct
positions, restart the library.
2061 Move failed pulling cartridge Check for labels or cartridge misalignments that would prevent
from drive. the cartridge from coming out of the drive.
2062 Move failed inserting cartridge Check for labels or cartridge misalignments that would prevent
to drive. the cartridge from moving into the drive.
2063 Move failed positioning picker Check for obstructions in the vertical or horizontal pathway of
in front of drive. the accessor. Examples might include a cartridge that isn’t seated
completely in a slot, an accessor isn’t sitting horizontally level,
or a problem with the accessor spooling cable that is impeding
progress.
2064 Library test failed with critical An unidentified failure occurred. Contact your IBM service
error. representative.
2065 Library startup process failed v Verify that magazines are closed, cartridges are fully seated,
because of accessor initialization and that no accessor obstructions exist.
issue.
v Verify that all modules are powered and any expansion
modules are cabled correctly with the interconnect cable.
v Verify that a top and bottom cover is properly installed on the
library.
v Verify that the module alignment locks (at rear of module) are
in the proper position.
v If the accessor moves front to back, but not vertically, the
accessor shipping lock might be positioned incorrectly and
must be moved to either the fully locked or fully unlocked
position.
v If the error persists, review library events for information or
restart the library.
2066 Library startup process failed v Verify that magazines are closed, cartridges are fully seated,
during inventory scan. and that no accessor obstructions exist.
v Verify that all modules are powered and any expansion
modules are cabled correctly with the interconnect cable.
v Verify that a top and bottom cover is properly installed on the
library.
v Verify that the module alignment locks (at rear of module) are
in the proper position.
v If the accessor moves front to back, but not vertically, the
accessor shipping lock might be positioned incorrectly and
must be moved to either the fully locked or fully unlocked
position.
v If the error persists, review library events for information or
restart the library.

86 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Table 36. Main error events (continued)
Event Code Message Text and Description Details and Solution
2067 For safety reason, the accessor v Ensure that all magazines, top or bottom covers and unit locks
movement was halted in place. are inserted and properly locked.
v Don’t open magazines by using the emergency release or
remove covers or unit locks while the library is operating and
the accessor is moving.
v Ensure that all modules are powered and have the
interconnect cable properly attached.
2068 An emergency stop condition v Ensure that all magazines, top or bottom covers and unit locks
was detected in one or more are inserted and properly locked.
modules and prevented the
v Insert all open magazines and install all necessary covers and
accessor from initialization.
unit locks before the library is powered on.
v Ensure that all modules are powered and have the
interconnect cable properly attached.
2069 Initialization failure due to bar Restart the library and if the error persists, replace the accessor
code reader error. assembly.
2070 Inventory scan failed because of v Check for obstructions in the vertical pathway of the accessor
Elevator axis problem. such as a cartridge that is sticking out.
v Verify module alignment and frame alignment.
v For proper operation, the accessor must be able to reach the
bottom of the library. Verify that no obstructions are at the
bottom of the library or on the bottom cover of the library in
the path of the accessor.
1. To check for obstructions at the bottom of the library, first
power off the library by pressing Power for 5 seconds and
select the Default Park location.
2. When the library is powered off, remove the left magazine of
the lowest library module, and verify that the entire area of
the bottom cover is free of any objects that might obstruct the
accessor's path.
3. After obstructions are cleared, replace the magazine, power
the library on, and after the library finishes initialization and
inventory, verify that no further critical events were
generated.
2071 Cartridge on picker when trying v Verify that no obstruction is in front of the bar code scanning
to scan. module on the cartridge table that is on the accessor.
v If the error persists, replace the accessor.
2072 Bottom cover was detected at an Review the stack assembly and place the covers to the proper
incorrect position. position.
2073 Top cover was detected at an Review the stack assembly and place the covers to the proper
incorrect position. position.
2074 The library startup failed due to Restart or power cycle system.
a GPIO error.
2075 The library startup failed due to Restart or power cycle system.
an error when trying to open
the accessor serial port.

Troubleshooting 87
 Table 36. Main error events (continued)
Event Code Message Text and Description Details and Solution
2076 I2C bus signals invalid. v Remove all drive canisters of the affected chassis and restart
the library.
v If the problem persists, replace the chassis. If not, add one
drive after the other until the problem comes back.
v Replace the last drive that was added before it failed again.
2077 Failed to store Calibration Data Restart or power cycle system.
to Chassis. Note: This is a singular ticket and must be resolved manually.
2079 Couldn’t upgrade bar code Restart the library and if the error persists, replace the accessor.
reader firmware.
2080 Cartridge lost while inserting it Check the source/destination element and ensure that no
into slot/drive. obstructions are in the pathway of the accessor.
2087 Error accessing the backplane v Restart the library and if the error persists, replace the chassis.
flash memory.
v Before the chassis is replaced, ensure that you remove all of
your tape cartridges.
v If magazines need to be removed to get access to the tape
cartridges, first power down the device and then manually
release each magazine. Only one magazine must be opened at
a time.
2092 Locking the accessor assembly Power up the library. In case of accessor failure, error events are
failed during Power Down reported at power-up. Look for the proposed solution for these
process new errors. If no new errors are reported, the 2092 event can be
ignored.
2093 Communication to accessor Restart the library and if the error persists, replace the accessor
controller couldn’t be assembly.
established.
2094 An emergency stop condition v Ensure that all magazines, top or bottom covers and unit locks
was detected in one or more are completely inserted and properly locked.
modules and prevented the
v Insert all open magazines and install all necessary covers and
accessor from running the
unit locks before powering on the library.
inventory scan.
v Ensure that all modules are powered and have the
interconnect cable properly attached.
2095 Inventory scan failed because of Check for obstructions in the horizontal pathway of the accessor
accessor positioning problem. such as a cartridge sticking out or lying on the accessor table.
2096 Initializing a communication Restart the library, and if the error persists, replace the library
interface on the library controller.
controller failed.
| 2097 Accessor reinitialization failed. Restart the library and if the error persists, replace the accessor
assembly.

Warning error events

An appropriate message is posted on the Operator Control Panel and the Management GUI.
Table 37. Warning events
Event Code Message Text and Description Details and Solution
4000 Drive Sled Fan Speed too low. Ensure that no obstructions are in the fan.
4002 Drive clean request. Clean the drive with an approved cleaning
cartridge.

88 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Table 37. Warning events (continued)
Event Code Message Text and Description Details and Solution
4003 The drive configuration failed. Remove and reseat the drive canister and retry
the operation.
4004 The drive status request failed. Remove and reseat the drive canister to ensure
that the drive is fully seated. If the issue persists,
reset the drive.
4005 Drive is reporting a critical TapeAlert. Power-cycle the drive, and verify whether the
drive reports the same TapeAlert.
4006 A drive reported temperature is above the v Verify that the drive fan is spinning, isn’t
threshold. obstructed, and that the ambient temperature
is within specification.
v Ensure that drive bay cover plates are in place
in each location where no drive is installed.
The drive cover plates are required for proper
airflow.
4007 Cartridge error. Remove the cartridge and inspect it for damage.
Retry operation with another cartridge.
4008 Cleaning tape expired. Discard the cleaning cartridge and retry the
cleaning operation with a new cleaning cartridge.
4009 Firmware upgrade of one or multiple The Base Module must be able to communicate
expansion modules failed. with a powered on and connected expansion
module to complete the upgrade.
v Reseat the expansion controller and check the
interconnect cable and power connections.
v Retry the firmware upgrade.
4010 Incompatible drive. Remove the incompatible drive. Install only
drives that are supported by the library.
4012 Move Cartridge failed due to cartridge issue. v View the event details to determine which
cartridge was involved.
v Verify surrounding events that might point to
problems with this media in other move
operations.
v Remove the media from the library, and
physically inspect the media to ensure that no
physical damage exists.
v If the media appears to be undamaged, put the
media back into the library and retry the move
operation. If the problem persists, retry the
operation with a different cartridge in the
same drive.
v If the problem follows the media, remove the
media from use.
v If the problem follows the drive, use the
library Management GUI to pull a drive
support ticket and check the device analysis
section for help.

Troubleshooting 89
Table 37. Warning events (continued)
Event Code Message Text and Description Details and Solution
4014 Library test failed due to a Drive issue. v Verify the test parameters, and retry the test.
v If the test fails, check the library event log for
specific events that are associated with this
drive.
v Use the Management GUI to pull a drive
support ticket and check the device analysis
section for help.
4015 Power supply failed. Redundancy isn’t Ensure that all power supplies are installed
available. properly (two per module), and that each power
supply is connected to a valid power source.
4016 Back up configuration data to base module Attempt to save the library configuration, power
failed. cycle the library, and retry the operation.
4017 Restore configuration data from Chassis Attempt to save the library configuration, power
failed. cycle the library, and retry the operation.
4018 Firmware upgrade failed, tape drive Verify that the firmware file is correct for the
reported an error while the firmware file drives, ensure that the drives are in a healthy
was applied. state with no cartridge in the drive, then retry
the operation.
4019 Drive Firmware bundle upgrade failed. 1. Verify that the firmware file is correct for the
drives.
2. Ensure that the drives are in a healthy state
with no cartridge in the drive.
3. Retry the operation.
4020 Database was reset due to a problem that v If the library was restored to default settings,
prevented the library from powering up. restore a saved configuration by using a
previously saved config file.
v If no config file exists, then proceed in
configuring the library.
4021 Drive was hot-removed while in active v Put the drive back into the library.
status as data transfer device.
v Follow the “Removing a tape drive” on page
112 procedure to remove the tape drive.
4025 Library test failed due to a cartridge error. Remove the cartridge and inspect it for damage.
Retry operation with another cartridge.
4028 Library Test failed due to incompatible Check LTO generation for cartridge and drives.
cartridge. Remove cartridges that aren’t compatible to your
tape drives.
4029 Library Test failed - Cartridge bar code Check if Media bar code label is matching LTO
indicates incompatibility with drive. generation. Replace the label or remove
incompatible media from your system.
4030 Move cartridge operation failed due to Remove the cartridge and inspect it for damage.
cartridge error. Retry operation with another cartridge.
4041 Library Verify failed because the power Ensure that all power supplies are installed
supply redundancy test failed. properly (two per module), and that each power
supply is connected to a valid power source.
4044 One of the Library tests failed because a Verify the source and destination elements and
source element or destination element isn’t retry the move operation.
accessible.

90 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

 Table 37. Warning events (continued)
Event Code Message Text and Description Details and Solution
4060 Connection to the KMIP server failed. v Verify the user name and password and all
needed SSL certificates that are needed for
connecting to the KMIP server.
v Verify that the KMIP server is reachable within
the network.
v Verify the IP addresses and host names of the
KMIP servers that are entered into the wizard.

| If this error happens during the connectivity

| check, the additional information parameter
| includes further error information received from
| the Cryptsoft KMIP library. It also includes the
| information if the server wasn't able to ping.
4061 Key isn’t found on KMIP server. Verify that the requested key is available on the
KMIP server. Check the KMIP server logs for
details.
4062 Key creation on KMIP server failed. Check the KMIP server logs for details about
why key creation failed.
4063 KMIP configuration invalid. Use the KMIP configuration wizard to verify the
KMIP configuration.
4064 KMIP feature not licensed. Disable KMIP or install appropriate license for
KMIP feature.
4065 A tape alert flag was reported by a drive. Look for logged TapeAlert flags and see its
description in the “TapeAlert flags” on page 99
section.
4067 Cleaning cartridge will soon expire and must Replace the cartridge.
be replaced.
4072 No cleaning cartridge in logical library v Auto cleaning is enabled, but the logical
available for auto cleaning. library contains no labeled cleaning cartridge.
The library was unable to complete the auto
clean function for one or more drives in this
logical library.
v Install a valid and labeled cleaning cartridge
into the logical library and then complete a
load and unload on the drive that needs
cleaning to start the auto cleaning.
4073 Medium source element empty. Check the source slot visually and rescan the
inventory. Additionally, check for valid and
readable bar code label.
4074 Medium source element empty. Check the source slot visually and rescan the
inventory. Additionally, check for valid and
readable bar code label.
4075 Cartridge lost while it was extracted from Check the source/destination element and ensure
slot/drive. that no obstructions are in the pathway of the
accessor.

Troubleshooting 91
Table 37. Warning events (continued)
Event Code Message Text and Description Details and Solution
4077 Unlocking the right magazine failed. v Restart the library and retry the operation.
v If the error persists, replace the chassis.
v If the magazine needs to be removed to get
access to the tape cartridges, first power down
the device, and then release the magazine
manually. Only one magazine can be open at a
time.
4078 Unlocking the left magazine failed. v Restart the library and retry the operation.
v If the error persists, replace the chassis.
v If the magazine needs to be removed to get
access to the tape cartridges, first power down
the device, and then release the magazine
manually. Only one magazine can be open at a
time.
4079 Unlocking the I/O station failed. v Restart the library and retry the operation.
v If the error persists, replace the chassis.
v If the I/O station needs to be removed to get
access to the tape cartridges, first power down
the device, and then release the magazine
manually. Only one magazine can be open at a
time.
4080 Library Verify test failed with warning. An unidentified failure occurred. Contact your
IBM service representative.
4085 Drive command retries expired. v Run a drive read/write test (Library > Actions
> Tests > Drive test) with a known working
cartridge.
v If the drive test is successful, check in the host
for errors that are related with the retries.
v If the drive test failed, replace the drive.
4086 Move operation failed. v Ensure that the network the library is
connected to is operating normally.
v Ensure that the library is running the current
firmware.
v Restart the library.
4089 Auto calibration of one or more modules v The library must be recalibrated.
failed. Adjustment to calibration target
v Ensure that the library firmware is up-to-date.
failed.
v This event indicates that one or more of the
gray calibration targets on the library
magazines couldn’t be used in calibration.
v Inspect the calibration targets in each module
and then repeat the auto-calibration routine
with the Management GUI.

92 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

Table 37. Warning events (continued)
Event Code Message Text and Description Details and Solution
4090 Auto calibration of one or more modules v The library must be recalibrated.
failed. Calibration target not found
v Ensure that the library firmware is up-to-date.
v This event indicates that one or more of the
gray calibration targets on the library
magazines couldn’t be used in calibration.
v Inspect the calibration targets in each module
and then repeat the auto-calibration routine
with the Management GUI.
4091 Auto calibration of one or more modules v The library must be recalibrated.
failed. Adjustment out of range
v Ensure that the library firmware is up-to-date.
v This event indicates that one or more of the
gray calibration targets on the library
magazines couldn’t be used in calibration.
v Inspect the calibration targets in each module
and then repeat the auto-calibration routine
with the Management GUI.
4093 Couldn’t obtain an IP address from DHCP v Check the network configuration settings and
server. check if the DHCP server is reachable.
v Use the network configuration menu or
unplug the network cable and plug it in after a
few seconds to trigger an automatic
reconfiguration of the network interface.
4095 Library test failed. Not enough valid Load the cartridges into the library.
cartridges available for testing.
4098 System time synchronization with SNTP Check for valid SNTP server address in Time
failed. configuration. If correct, ensure that the server is
reachable from your network and not blocked by
a firewall.
4099 An unexpected reset of accessor was Ensure that the spooling cable is fully seated in
detected. the base module and connected correctly to the
accessor assembly. If the error recurs, replace the
accessor assembly.
4113 Move from drive failed. Check for labels or cartridge misalignments that
prevents the cartridge from coming out of the
slot or drive.
4117 Drive disabled because no power supply Remove all affected drives, insert, and power up
available. at least one power supply to the failing module.
Wait 10 seconds and put the drives back into the
module.
4119 Drive disabled because internal IP address v Remove affected drive, wait 10 seconds, and
unknown. put it back into the module.
v Restart Library stack.
4120 No empty drive available for system test. Make sure that at least one empty drive and one
compatible cartridge are available.
4121 No compatible media available for system Make sure that at least one empty drive and one
test. compatible cartridge are in the drive.
4122 No cartridge available for slot to slot Make sure that at least one cartridge and one
exerciser test. empty slot are in the library.

Troubleshooting 93
Table 37. Warning events (continued)
Event Code Message Text and Description Details and Solution
4123 No empty slot available for slot to slot Make sure that at least one cartridge and one
exerciser test. empty slot are in the library.
4124 Drive or media statistics couldn’t be Check for more warning tickets. Replace media if
retrieved when the tape was unloaded. media-related tape alert flags reported.
4126 Cartridge was found in inaccessible slot of Bottom slots from the lowermost unit are
lowermost unit. inaccessible to the accessor. Place the cartridge in
an upper slot.
4127 Drive was restarted because of canister reset. Verify that the drive is installed properly in its
slot and thumb screws are tightened. If the error
persists, replace the drive.
4128 An installed power supply is detected but Ensure that the power supply has a power cord
doesn’t provide power. plugged in and is connected to a valid power
source. Although the power source isn’t
available, this expansion module can still be used
for tape storage. Operation of tape drives isn’t
possible.
4129 Move from drive failed. Check backup application how to allow media
removal from drive. If unsuccessful, try the Force
Drive Media Eject option in the Operations
menu.
4133 Protection Foam not removed from Base v Power down the library.
Module
v Remove top cover and then remove the
protection foam.
v Install the top cover again and restart the
library.
4135 Drive diagnostic failed Use another diagnostic tape and run test once
more. If still failing, download drive dumps and
contact service.
4136 The base module detected an installed Ensure that the power supply has a power cord
power supply but this power supply doesn’t plugged in and is connected to a valid power
provide power. source.
4137 Diagnostic Tape not removed. Open Magazine or I/O station to remove the
diagnostic tape with the OP or Management GUI.
4139 Magazine or I/O Station operation failed. v Check whether any obstacle is preventing the
accessor from movement.
v Restart the library and retry the operation. If
the error persists, replace the accessor
assembly.
v If the magazine needs to be removed to get
access to the tape cartridges, first power down
the device and then release the magazine
manually. Only one magazine can be open at a
time.
4140 Personality mismatch detected. Replace either chassis or library controller to
ensure that all parts in the stack are matching the
personality of the main library controller.
4141 Drive requires cleaning. Clean the drive with an approved cleaning
cartridge.
4142 Medium destination element full. Ensure that your destination slot or drive is
empty and try again.

94 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

 Table 37. Warning events (continued)
Event Code Message Text and Description Details and Solution
4144 Unit to unit lock of lowermost module is Ensure that the alignment mechanism isn’t
engaged. engaged in the lowermost module.
| 4150 Sequential Mode move operation failed. Check event details for further information.
|| 4151 Download of drive firmware image v Check if the uploaded firmware image is
|| completed, but firmware revision didn’t matching your drive type and generation.
| change after restart.
| v Ensure that the image file isn’t corrupted.
| v Download a new image from the drive
| vendor's website if you aren’t sure about file
| integrity.
| 4152 KMIP Connection refused The selected port on the target machine isn’t
| open. The connection is refused. Check that the
| server application is running on the target
| machine and the firewall isn’t blocking the
| selected port. Contact IT Personnel to verify the
| port settings.
| 4153 KMIP Server doesn’t trust the client Use a client certificate that is signed by a trusted
| certificate. certificate authority (CA) or manually select the
| untrusted certificate on the server side and trust
| it (not available on all servers).
| 4154 KMIP Ping to server failed The target machine couldn't be reached, so no
| network connection possible.
| v Verify that the IP address in the settings is
| correct.
| v Check that the target machine is powered and
| connected to the network.
| v Check the network cable.
| v Verify that the Firewall setting on the target
| machine allows ping requests and responses.
| 4155 KMIP No route to host The target machine couldn't be reached. The
| network route to the machine isn’t available.
| v Check your IP settings (IP address, Gateway
| and Netmask) and verify it with your IT
| personnel.
| v Check that the Firewall settings on the target
| machine are correct.
| 4156 KMIP Handshake failure The TLS connection couldn't be established
| because of Handshake errors during certificate
| exchange.
| v Check the certificates on server and client side
| for valid entries and that they are still valid
| and not expired.
| v Verify that TLS1.2 is enabled on the server.
| v Check the client and server date/time for
| current time.
| v Ask your IT personnel for new and valid
| certificates.

Troubleshooting 95
 Table 37. Warning events (continued)
Event Code Message Text and Description Details and Solution
| 4157 KMIP Certificate unknown The server certificate is unknown, because its
| root certificate is missing or not trusted. Run a
| new certificate request with your server or
| certificate authority and import the resulting
| certificate chain.
| 4158 KMIP host name lookup failed. The host name on the network couldn't be found.
| It doesn't exist or is misspelled.
| v Verify that the entered host name is correct.
| v Check your DNS address in the network
| settings.
| v Contact your IT personnel to verify the entered
| data.
| 4159 KMIP certificate verify failed. The TLS server certificate couldn't be verified as
| a valid and trusted certificate.
| v Check if your server root certificate changed.
| v Create a certificate request against your server
| to generate a new client certificate based on
| the changed server certificates.

Configuration Change events

Table 38. Configuration Change events
Event Code Message Text and Description
8000 The configuration of a drive changed.
8001 The drive was added or removed from the system.
8002 A logical library was added/removed or changed.
8003 I/O station was enabled/disabled.
8004 Drive firmware changed due to firmware upgrade.
8005 Hostname/domain name changed.
8006 Email configuration settings changed.
8007 Date/time format changed.
8009 Time zone configuration changed.
8011 Network configuration changed.
8012 Expansion Module upgraded.
8013 NTP time server settings changed.
| 8014 The SSH Access was enabled/disabled.
8016 Library reset default settings started by user.
8017 Library Firmware changed.
8018 The Unlabeled Cartridge Support configuration changed.
8019 Accessor firmware version upgraded.
8022 Management GUI/Operator Panel Timeout configuration changed.
8024 I/O station/Magazine access control configuration changed.
8026 Accessor change detected.
8029 The SNMP configuration changed.

96 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

 Table 38. Configuration Change events (continued)
Event Code Message Text and Description
8030 An SNMP target was added.
8031 An SNMP target was deleted.
8033 The Operator Panel module was changed.
8034 Manual Drive reset executed.
8036 New chassis detected.
8037 Chassis was removed.
8040 LDAP Server was added.
8041 LDAP Server was modified.
8042 LDAP Server was deleted.
8043 LDAP User was added.
8044 LDAP User was modified.
8045 LDAP User was deleted.
8046 Logout prevention configuration changed.
8057 Hardware component added.
8058 Hardware component removed.
8059 Hardware component of Library replaced.
8060 New Expansion Controller detected.
8061 New Base Library Controller detected.
8062 Auto calibration successfully finished.
8064 Password rules configuration changed.
8065 User was added.
8066 User was deleted.
| 8068 Remote Logging configuration changed.
8069 User password changed.
8072 Kerberos Realm was added.
8073 Kerberos Realm was modified.
8074 Kerberos Realm was deleted.
8075 Kerberos User was added.
8076 Kerberos User was modified.
8077 Kerberos User was deleted.

Informational events
Table 39. Informational Events
Event Code Message Text and Description
9000 A tape alert flag was reported by a drive.
9001 A drive is present but currently disabled.
9002 The library was powered on.
9003 Move Cartridge command was run.
9004 Inventory scan was completed.
9005 The library was powered down from Front Panel.

Troubleshooting 97
 Table 39. Informational Events (continued)
Event Code Message Text and Description
9006 The network interface was turned on.
9007 The network interface was turned off.
9008 The System Time was synchronized with an NTP server.
9009 A magazine was unlocked and opened.
9010 A magazine was closed and locked.
9011 An I/O station was unlocked and opened.
9012 An I/O station was closed and locked.
9013 A user logged in at the Management GUI.
9014 A user logged out at the Management GUI.
9015 A user logged in at the Operator Panel interface.
9016 A user logged out at the Operator Panel interface.
9024 Drive support ticket created.
9025 Library test started.
9026 Library test successfully finished.
9027 Library test was stopped by user.
9028 Configuration back up to chassis was successful.
9029 Configuration restore from chassis was successful.
9031 Library health Status was changed to status "OK”.
9032 Library health status was changed to status "Warning".
9033 Library health status was changed to status “Critical”.
9035 New library chassis detected.
9038 The library was rebooted through user interface.
9041 Key on KMIP server created.
9043 Drive cleaning was started.
9045 Library configuration data failed to duplicate on to the Base Module.
9060 One or multiple configured DNS servers aren’t responding.
9061 User account was locked due to too many invalid login attempts on Management GUI.
9062 Invalid password used for login.
9063 The network port used to contact the encryption server was changed.
9064 Backup of certificate created.
9065 Certificate is restored.
9066 Temporary password generated.
| 9067 LTO7 formatted cartridge with a Type M bar code detected.
| 9068 Type M cartridge without a Type M bar code detected.
| 9069 Sequential Mode load sequence ended because last storage cartridge of logical library was
| unloaded.
| 9070 Sequential Mode load sequence restarted (Loop Mode) because last storage cartridge of logical
| library was unloaded.

98 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide

TapeAlert flags
This section is intended to provide information to the reader about the tape drive by using TapeAlert
technology.

All error code and diagnostic information can be accessed from the Management GUI of the library. The
drive portion of the Management GUI contains drive error codes. Therefore, it is not necessary to open
the Library to access the buttons on the drive. See “Locating Management functions” on page 63 for a
complete description of the Management GUI functions and displays.

TapeAlert is a standard that defines status conditions and problems that are experienced by devices such
as tape drives, autoloaders, and libraries. The standard enables a server to read TapeAlert messages
(called flags) from a tape drive with the SCSI bus. The server reads the flags from Log Sense Page 0x2E.
Refer to the IBM TS4300 Tape Library SCSI Reference for library and drive TapeAlert Flag information.

This library is compatible with TapeAlert technology, which provides error and diagnostic information
about the drives and the library to the server. Because library and drive firmware might change
periodically, the SNMP interface in the library does not require code changes if devices add more
TapeAlerts that are not supported today. However, if this issue occurs the Management Information Block
(MIB) is written to minimize impact to the SNMP monitoring station. At the time of this writing, the
TapeAlert flags correctly represent TapeAlerts that are sent. The MIB file must not be taken to mean that
all traps that are defined in the MIB are sent by the library or that they will be sent in the future.

TapeAlert flags supported by the library

Parameter
Code Flag name Type Description
01d Library C The media changer mechanism is having difficulty communicating with
Hardware A the drive:
v Turn the media changer OFF, then ON
v Restart the operation.
v If problem persists, contact Technical Support.
02d Library W There is a problem with the media changer mechanism. If the problem
Hardware B persists, contact Technical Support.
04d Library C The library has a hardware fault that is not mechanically related or
Hardware D requires a power cycle to recover.
v Turn the media changer OFF, then ON.
v Restart the operation.
v If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.
05d Library W The library mechanism might have a hardware fault.
Diagnostics
Required Run extended diagnostics to verify and diagnose the problem. Check the
library user's manual for device-specific instructions on running extended
diagnostic tests.
13d Library Pick W There is a potential problem with the drive ejecting cartridges or with the
Retry library picking cartridges from a slot.
v No action needs to be taken at this time.
v If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.
14d Library Place W There is a potential problem with the library mechanism placing a
Retry cartridge into a slot.
v No action needs to be taken at this time.
v If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.

Troubleshooting 99
Parameter
Code Flag name Type Description
15d Library Load W There is a potential problem with the drive or the library mechanism
Retry loading cartridges, or an incompatible cartridge.

This flag is cleared when the next move command is received.

16d Library Door C The operation failed because the library door is open.
v Clear any obstructions from the library door.
v Close the library door.
v If the problem persists, call the library supplier help line.
17d Library I/O C There is a mechanical problem with the library media I/O Station.
Station
19d Library W Library security is compromised. The door was opened then closed
Security during operation.
20d Library I The library security mode was changed. The library was either put into
Security Mode secure mode, or the library exited the secure mode. This is for
information purposes only. No action is required.
21d Library Offline I The library was manually turned offline and is unavailable for use.
22d Library Drive I A drive inside the library was taken offline. This is for information
Offline purposes only. No action is required.
24d Library C The library detected an inconsistency in its inventory.
Inventory v Redo the library inventory to correct inconsistency.
v Restart the operation.
28d Power Supply W A redundant power supply failed inside the library. Check the library
users manual for instructions on replacing the failed power supply.
33d Library C The total number of volumes exceeds the available number of storage
Capacity elements. Remove a cartridge from the inventory to recover.
Exceeded

v I = Informational suggestion to user

v W = Warning. Remedial action is advised. Performance of data might be at risk.
v C = Critical immediate remedial action is required.

TapeAlert flags supported by the drive

Flag Hex
Number Flag Name Code Description Action Required Event
1 Read warning 01h Set when the tape drive is having Isolate the fault between drive Warning
problems reading data. No data and tape by following these Event
is lost, but there is a reduction in steps:
the performance of the tape. v Use a known good tape
cartridge in the suspect drive.
If the drive fails, contact your
IBM® Service Representative.
v Use the suspect tape cartridge
in a known good drive. If the
test fails, discard the cartridge.

100 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
 Flag Hex
Number Flag Name Code Description Action Required Event
2 Write warning 02h Set when the tape drive is having Isolate the fault between drive Warning
problems writing data. No data is and tape by following these Event
lost, but there is a reduction in steps:
the performance of the tape. v Use a known good tape
cartridge in the suspect drive.
If the drive fails, contact your
IBM® service representative.
v Use the suspect tape cartridge
in a known good drive. If the
test fails, discard the cartridge.
3 Hard error 03h Set for any unrecoverable read, See the Action Required column Warning
write, or positioning error. (This for Flag Number 4, 5, or 6 in this Event
flag is set with flags 4, 5, or 6). table.
4 Media 04h Set for any unrecoverable read, Replace the tape cartridge. Warning
write, or positioning error that is Event
due to a faulty tape cartridge.
5 Read failure 05h Set for any unrecoverable read If Flag Number 4 is also set, the Warning
error where isolation is uncertain cartridge is defective. Replace the Event
and failure might be due to a tape cartridge. If Flag Number 4
faulty tape cartridge or to faulty is not set, see Error Code 6 in
drive hardware. “Drive Error Codes:
Single-character display (SCD)”
on page 104.
6 Write failure 06h Set for any unrecoverable write If Flag Number 9 is also set, Warning
or positioning error where make sure that the write-protect Event
isolation is uncertain and failure switch is set so that data can be
might be due to a faulty tape written to the tape. If Flag
cartridge or to faulty drive Number 4 is also set, the
hardware. cartridge is defective. Replace the
tape cartridge. If Flag Number 4
is not set, see Error Code 6 in
“Drive Error Codes:
Single-character display (SCD)”
on page 104.
7 Media life 07h Set when the tape cartridge 1. Copy the data to another tape Warning
reaches its end of life (EOL). cartridge. Event
2. Discard the old (EOL) tape.
8 Not data grade 08h Set when the cartridge is not Replace the tape with a Warning
data-grade. Any data that you data-grade tape. Event
write to the tape is at risk.
9 Write protect 09h Set when the tape drive detects Make sure that the cartridge's Warning
that the tape cartridge is write-protect switch is set so that Event
write-protected. the tape drive can write data to
the tape.
10 No removal 0Ah Set when the tape drive receives Refer to the documentation for Info
an UNLOAD command after the your server's operating system. Event
server prevented the tape
cartridge from being removed.
11 Cleaning media 0Bh Set when you load a cleaning No action is required. Info
cartridge into the drive. Informational message only. Event

Troubleshooting 101
 Flag Hex
Number Flag Name Code Description Action Required Event
12 Unsupported 0Ch Set when you load an Use a supported tape cartridge. Info
format unsupported cartridge type into Event
the drive or when the cartridge
format is corrupted.
14 Unrecoverable 0Eh Set when the tape is snapped/cut Do not attempt to extract the old Warning
snapped tape or has a mechanical failure. tape cartridge. Call the tape drive Event
supplier's help line.
15 Cartridge memory 0Fh Set when a cartridge memory Replace the tape cartridge. If this Warning
chip failure (CM) failure is detected on the error occurs on multiple Event
loaded tape cartridge. cartridges, see Error Code 6 in
“Drive Error Codes:
Single-character display (SCD)”
on page 104.
16 Forced eject 10h Set when you manually unload No action is required. Warning
the tape cartridge while the drive Informational message only. Event
was reading or writing.
17 Loaded media is 11h Set when a write attempt is made No action is required. Warning
Read-only format on a read-only cartridge. The flag Informational message only. Event
is cleared when the cartridge is
ejected (this flag is not supported
for Ultrium 1 or Ultrium 2).
18 Tape directory is 12h Set when the drive detects that Reread all data from the tape to Warning
corrupted in the the tape directory in the cartridge rebuild the tape directory. Event
cartridge memory memory is corrupted.
19 Nearing media 13h Set when the tape cartridge is 1. Copy the data to another tape Info
life nearing its specified end of life. cartridge. Event
2. Replace the tape cartridge.
20 Clean now 14h Set when the tape drive detects Clean the tape drive. Warning
that it needs cleaning. Event
21 Clean periodic 15h Set when the drive detects that it Clean the tape drive as soon as Warning
needs routine cleaning. possible. The drive can continue Event
to operate, but you must clean
the drive soon.
22 Expired clean 16h Set when the tape drive detects Replace the cleaning cartridge. Warning
an expired cleaning cartridge. Event
23 Invalid cleaning 17h Set when the drive expects a Use a valid cleaning cartridge. Warning
tape cleaning cartridge and the loaded Event
cartridge is not a cleaning
cartridge.
25 Interface 19h Set when the tape drive detects a Locate Error Code 8 or 9 in Warning
problem with the SCSI, Fibre “Drive Error Codes: Event
Channel, or RS-422 interface. Single-character display (SCD)”
on page 104.
26 Cooling Fan 1Ah A tape drive cooling fan failed. Fan failure inside tape drive Warning
Failure mechanism or tape drive Event
enclosure.

102 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
 Flag Hex
Number Flag Name Code Description Action Required Event
27 Power Supply 1Bh A redundant power supply failed A redundant power supply failed Warning
inside the tape drive enclosure. inside the tape drive enclosure. Event
Check the enclosure users Check the enclosure users
manual for instructions on manual for instructions on
replacing the failed power replacing the failed power
supply. supply.
30 Hardware A 1Eh Set when a hardware failure A redundant power supply failed Warning
occurs that requires that you reset inside the tape drive enclosure. Event
the tape drive to recover. Check the enclosure users
manual for instructions on
replacing the failed power
supply.
31 Hardware B 1Fh Set when the tape drive fails its Note the error code on the Warning
internal Power-On Self-Tests. single-character display and see Event
in “Drive Error Codes:
Single-character display (SCD)”
on page 104 for the appropriate
instructions.
32 Interface 20h Set when the tape drive detects a Set when the tape drive detects a Warning
problem with the SCSI, Fibre problem with the SCSI, Fibre Event
Channel, or RS-422 interface. Channel, or RS-422 interface.
33 Eject media 21h Set when a failure occurs that Unload the tape cartridge, then Warning
requires you to unload the reinsert it and restart the Event
cartridge from the drive. operation.
34 Download fail 22h Set when the tape drive detects a Ensure that it is the correct FMR Warning
problem with the SCSI, Fibre image. Download the FMR image Event
Channel, or RS-422 interface. again.
36 Drive temperature 24h Set when the drive's temperature See Error Code 1 in “Drive Error Warning
sensor indicates that the drive's Codes: Single-character display Event
temperature is exceeding the (SCD)” on page 104.
recommended temperature of the
library.
37 Drive voltage 25h Set when the drive detects that See Error Code 2 in “Drive Error Warning
the externally supplied voltages Codes: Single-character display Event
are either approaching the (SCD)” on page 104.
specified voltage limits or are
outside the voltage limits.
38 Predictive failure 26h A hardware failure of the tape Predictive failure of drive Warning
drive is predicted. Call the tape hardware Event
drive supplier helpline.
39 Failure 27h The tape drive might have a The drive might have a failure Warning
fault. Check for availability of that can be identified by stored Event
diagnostic information and run diagnostic information or by
extended diagnostics if running extended diagnostics
applicable. Check the tape drive (Send Diagnostics).
user's manual for instructions on
running extended diagnostic tests
and retrieving diagnostic data.
49 Diminished 31h Set when Native Capacity is No action is required. Info
Native Capacity diminished. Informational message only. Event

Troubleshooting 103
 Flag Hex
Number Flag Name Code Description Action Required Event
51 Tape directory 33h Set when the tape directory on Use your backup software to Warning
invalid at unload the tape cartridge that was rebuild the tape directory by Event
previously unloaded is corrupted. reading all the data.
The file-search performance is
degraded.
52 Tape system area 34h Set when the tape cartridge that Copy the data to another tape Warning
write failure was previously unloaded cannot cartridge, and discard the old Event
write its system area successfully. cartridge.
53 Tape system area 35h Set when the tape system area Copy the data to another tape Warning
read failure cannot be read successfully at cartridge, and discard the old Event
load time. cartridge.
55 Load Failure 37h The operation failed because the Remove the tape and try another. Warning
media cannot be loaded and If the problem persists, contact Event
threaded. your IBM® service representative.
56 Unrecoverable 38h The operation failed because the Contact your IBM® service Warning
unload failure media cannot be unloaded. representative. Event
59 WORM Medium 3Bh Set when the drive determines 1. Copy the data to another Warning
– integrity check that the data on tape is suspect WORM tape cartridge. Event
failed from a WORM point of view.
2. Discard the faulty WORM
tape.
60 WORM Medium 3Ch Set when the drive rejects a write Write the data to a WORM tape Warning
– Overwrite operation because the rules for cartridge or write the data to a Event
attempted allowing WORM writes are not non-WORM tape cartridge.
met. Data can be appended only
to WORM media. Overwrites to
WORM media are not allowed.

Sense data
When a drive encounters an error, it provides sense data as a response to the host.

Refer to the IBM TS4300 Tape Library SCSI Reference for library sense data information. Refer to the IBM
LTO Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI Reference for tape drive sense data information.

In addition, you can use the IBM Tape Diagnostic Tool (ITDT) to further examine data and determine
errors. See “IBM Tape Diagnostic tool (ITDT)” on page 79.

Drive Error Codes: Single-character display (SCD)

SCD drive error codes give descriptions of the errors and messages that pertain to the drive.

If you encounter problems while the tape drive is running, refer to “Finding event information” on page
73.

The SCD display appears on the inside back of an installed library and can be seen through the front
window of an expansion unit. It is seen on the lower center of a full-height drive. Each drive has a status
light and single-character display, that when visible provides drive informational and error conditions.
The single-character display shows either a single character, a dot (in the lower right of the display), or
both.

Note: The SCD can be seen through the windows of expansion units, and for full-height drives only. If
you have a base unit without expansion units, or if you have half-height drives, the SCD cannot be seen.

104 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
“Single-character display (SCD) codes” lists the codes for error conditions and informational messages. If
multiple errors occur, the code with the highest priority (represented by the lowest number) displays first.
When the error is corrected, the code with the next highest priority displays until no errors remain.

The SCD is blank during normal operation.

Single-character display (SCD) codes

Table 40 gives descriptions of the errors and messages that pertain to the drive. For troubleshooting tips,
see “Troubleshooting Guide” on page 73.
v Make note of the SCD error code before a cartridge is removed or the SCD error code is cleared.
v If an error occurred with a cartridge in the drive, eject the cartridge from the drive with the library
Management GUI (see “Locating Management functions” on page 63).

Attention: If the drive detects a permanent error and displays an error code other than SCD , it
automatically runs a drive dump. If you force a drive dump, the existing dump is overwritten and data
can be lost. After you force a drive dump, do not turn OFF the power to the drive or you might lose the
dump data.
Table 40. Error codes on the single-character display
Error code Meaning
No error occurred and no action is required. This code displays when diagnostics finish
running and no error occurred.
Note: The single-character display is blank during normal operation of the tape drive.
Temperature problem. The tape drive detected that the recommended operating
temperature was exceeded.
Power problem. The tape drive detected that the externally supplied power is outside the
specified voltage limits (the tape drive is not operating).
Firmware problem. The tape drive determined that a firmware error occurred
Note: Do not force a new dump; the tape drive already created one.
Firmware or hardware problem. The tape drive determined that a firmware or tape drive
hardware failure occurred.
Note: Do not force a new dump; the tape drive already created one.
Tape drive hardware problem. The drive determined that a tape path or read/write error
occurred.
Notes:
v To prevent damage to the drive or tape, the tape drive does not allow a cartridge to be
inserted if the current cartridge was successfully ejected.
v Do not force a new dump; the tape drive already created one.
Tape drive or media error. The tape drive determined that an error occurred, but it cannot
isolate the error to faulty hardware or to the tape cartridge. Ensure that the tape cartridge is
the correct media type. See Appendix B, “LTO media,” on page 149.
Tape drive or media error. The tape drive determined that an error occurred, but it cannot
isolate the error to faulty hardware or to the tape cartridge. Ensure that the tape cartridge is
the correct media type. See Appendix B, “LTO media,” on page 149.
Interface problem. The tape drive determined that a failure occurred in the tape drive
hardware or in the host bus.
Note: The error code clears 10 seconds after the drive detected the error.
Tape drive or library-drive communication error. The tape drive determined that a failure
occurred in the tape drive's hardware or in the library-drive connection.

Troubleshooting 105
Table 40. Error codes on the single-character display (continued)
Error code Meaning
Degraded operation. The tape drive determined that a problem occurred which degraded
the operation of the tape drive, but it did not restrict continued use. If the problem persists,
determine whether the problem is with the drive or the media.
Note: The drive is usable, though the single-character display continues to indicate an error
and the status light flashes amber.
The tape drive needs to be cleaned. See “Locating Management functions” on page 63.

Fiber AL_PA conflict. Two drives on fiber loop have the same AL_PA.

Encryption error. Displayed when the drive detects an error that is associated with an
encryption operation.
Fiber Port offline. Displayed when the drive fiber port received a port bypass command
from another port on the Fibre Channel network.
Fibre Channel error. No light is displayed if the drive fiber port does not detect light.

Write operation to a write protected cartridge was attempted. This action includes any
attempt to overwrite a WORM protected tape. Ensure that the tape cartridge is the correct
media type. See Appendix B, “LTO media,” on page 149.

SCD dot
If a drive dump is present while the drive is in maintenance mode, a single red dot illuminates in the
lower right corner of the SCD. To download the drive dump, see “Locating Management functions” on
page 63 or “IBM Tape Diagnostic tool (ITDT)” on page 79.

The SCD dot turns OFF when you obtain a dump or update the drive firmware.

Note: If the drive dump is stored in ROM memory (SCD dot ON solid), the dump is lost when you turn
OFF the power or reset the drive.

Status light
The Status light is a light-emitting diode (LED) that provides information about the state of the drive.
The light can be green or amber, and (when lit) solid or flashing. Table 41 lists the conditions of the
Status light and single-character display (SCD) and provides an explanation of what each condition
means.
Table 41. Meaning of Status light and single-character display (SCD)
If the
And the
Status light Meaning
SCD is...
is...
OFF OFF The drive has no power or is powered OFF.
Green OFF The drive is powered ON and in an idle state.
Flashing OFF The drive is reading from the tape, writing to the tape, rewinding the tape, locating data
green on the tape, loading the tape, or unloading the tape.
Flashing OFF The drive contains a cartridge during the power-ON cycle. In this case, the drive
green completes POST and slowly rewinds the tape (the process can take up to ten minutes).
The light stops flashing and becomes solid when the drive completes the recovery and is
ready for a read or write operation.
Flashing Displaying The drive is displaying error codes from the error code log on the SCD.
amber error code

106 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Table 41. Meaning of Status light and single-character display (SCD) (continued)
If the
And the
Status light Meaning
SCD is...
is...
Amber Red During the power-on/initialization and POST (power-on self-test), the SCD briefly
numbers,
displays , then becomes blank (not lit) when POST is complete and no POST errors
letters, or
occur. If a POST error is detected, an error code is displayed in the SCD and the Status
segments
light flashes amber.
Amber Flashing The drive is exiting from maintenance mode.

Amber Flashing The drive is running the maintenance function.

function
Flashing Displaying An error occurred and the drive or media might require service, or it might require
amber once error code cleaning.
per second
Flashing Displaying The drive needs cleaning.
amber once
per second
Flashing OFF The drive is updating firmware.
amber twice
per second
Flashing OFF The drive detected an error and is running a firmware recovery. It resets automatically.
amber twice
per second
Flashing Flashing The drive is requesting a cartridge to be loaded.
amber twice
per second
Flashing OFF A drive dump is in flash memory.
amber twice
per second
Power must not be removed from the drive until the microcode update is complete. The drive indicates that the
update is complete by resetting and running POST.

Troubleshooting 107
108 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Upgrading and servicing
In this section, you can follow the procedures to add, remove, and replace library components.

Recommended tools
v #2 Phillips screwdriver
v Small Flat Head or Torx screwdriver

Identifying a failed component

Check which module contains the failed component. See “Identifying a failed component” on page 73. If
replacement parts are needed, go to Appendix C, “Replacement parts,” on page 169.

Internal view of library

Figure 55. Internal view of the library

Table 42. Internal view description

Number Item Description
▌1▐ Right cartridge magazine If the module is on the bottom, the right cartridge magazine holds 16
cartridges; if anywhere else in the library, it can hold 20 cartridges.
▌2▐ Left cartridge magazine If the module is on the bottom, the left cartridge magazine holds 16 cartridges;
if anywhere else in the library, it can hold 20 cartridges.
▌3▐ Accessor This component contains the library accessor and bar code reader. The
accessor moves cartridges to and from the
v I/O station
v Storage slots
v Tape drive

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 109

Table 42. Internal view description (continued)
Number Item Description
▌4▐ Controller Card This component is a customer replaceable unit (CRU) and stores the user
configuration information or vital product data (VPD).
▌5▐ Tape drive The module can contain a half-height or a full-height tape drive. The drive is
a customer replaceable unit (CRU), and is designed for easy removal and
replacement.
▌6▐ Power supply The power supply is a customer replaceable unit (CRU) and the sole source of
power for the module. The module is shipped with one power supply, but can
contain an optional second power supply for redundancy.
▌7▐ Robotic lock lever This component is used to lock down the accessor so it cannot move. This
action is done when the module is moved or when the robotic assembly is
removed.
▌8▐ Finger hole One of two finger holes that are used to lift out the accessor assembly. The
other is under the accessor in the photograph.
▌9▐ Spooling mechanism This component moves the accessor.

Adding, removing, or replacing a tape drive

Table 43. Pinch hazard
CAUTION:
Risk of pinching hands or fingers. Can trap hands, fingers, and cause
serious injury. Keep hands clear during operation. (L012)

Note: Only individuals who are informed about the procedures and risks can replace or upgrade this
tape drive assembly. Read all troubleshooting documentation and procedures before you proceed with
repair or upgrade procedures. Hazardous moving parts exist inside this product. Do not insert tools or
any portion of your body into the drive bay openings.

Adding a tape drive

1. If you are adding a tape drive, remove a drive bay cover. With a Philips screwdriver, remove one
half-height drive bay cover to install one half-height drive, or remove two drive bays covers to install
a full-height tape drive.

110 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figure 56. Drive bay covers

Note: A full-height tape drive must be installed in the lowest bay of the module.
2. Align and slowly insert the new tape drive into the drive bay along the alignment rails (▌1▐ in
Figure 57) while the drive assembly is supported. The tape drive must be flush with the back panel of
the library.

Figure 57. Alignment rails

3. Tighten the captive thumbscrews (▌1▐ in Figure 58 on page 112) with your fingers until the tape drive
is secure.

Upgrading and servicing 111

Figure 58. Installing a tape drive

4. Verify the drive operation.

Removing a tape drive

v Ensure that all host activity, including library operations are stopped to the drive being removed.
v Ensure that the tape cartridge is removed from the tape drive. Use the Management GUI to move the
cartridge to a storage slot or I/O station.
v Remove the FC or SAS cables from the tape drive.
v Loosen the blue captive thumbscrews (▌1▐ in Figure 59) on the tape drive. Press the lock lever (▌2▐
Figure 59) to the right and pull straight back on the tape drive handle while the bottom of the drive is
supported to remove it from the unit.

Figure 59. Unlocking the drive

Attention: Support the bottom of the tape drive when it is removed to avoid damaging any of the
internal connections.
v Reset the list of known drives and modules. See “Locating Management functions” on page 63.
v Confirm that the drive is logically removed by checking the Operator Panel or Management GUI.
v If there is no replacement drive, install the drive bay cover.
v If you are replacing the drive, see “Adding a tape drive” on page 110.

112 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Verifying Drive installation and operation

Using the Operator Panel or the Management GUI:

1. Confirm that the library recognizes the new tape drive by checking the Operator Panel or
Management GUI. The new drive appears in the module status overview area on the left side of the
screen.
2. Use the Management GUI or Operator Panel to verify that the tape drive has the current firmware.
Update the firmware if necessary.
3. Use the Management GUI or Operator Panel to test the drive. See “Locating Management functions”
on page 63.

Adding or replacing a Base or Expansion Module

Note:

Product Weight

Caution: The weight of this part or unit is between 18.1 and 33.6 kg (40 and
74 lb). It takes two persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C009)

Caution: The weight of this part or unit is between 33.6 and 46.3 kg (74 and
102 lb). It takes three persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C010)

Risk of personal injury

Before a module is moved or lifted

v Observe local health and safety requirements and guidelines for manual
material handling.
v Remove all tapes to reduce the weight and to prevent cartridges from
falling into the robotics path and damaging the library.
v Remove all tape drives to reduce the weight.
v Obtain adequate assistance to lift and stabilize the module during
installation or removal.

Risk of damage to devices

When a module is placed into or removed from a rack

v Extend the rack’s leveling jacks to the floor.
v Ensure that the full weight of the rack rests on the leveling jacks.
v Install stabilizing feet on the rack.
v Extend only one rack component at a time.
CAUTION:
Parts can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Keep parts in electrostatic
containers until needed. Ensure that you are properly grounded when
static sensitive components are touched.

Adding a module: Overview

To add a module to an existing configuration, you will

1. Power down the library.
2. Remove the top or bottom plate of the module. See “Preparing top and bottom modules” on page 40.
3. Install the module into the rack. See “Installing modules in a rack” on page 43.

Upgrading and servicing 113

4. Align and connect the modules. See “Aligning and connecting modules” on page 47.
5. Connect the components and cables. See “Replacing the Module components and cables” on page 118.
6. Connect the power cords, power on the library, and complete “Verifying Library Module installation
and configuration” on page 118.
7. Add tape cartridges to the new module.

Replacing a module: Overview

To replace the module, you will

1. Save the library configuration. See “Saving the configuration.”
2. Remove tape cartridges and power off the library. See “Removing the magazines and cartridges” and
“Powering off the library.”
3. Remove all the components from the module and disconnect the power cords and cables. See
“Removing the Module cables” on page 115.
4. Remove the module from the rack. See “Removing the Module from a rack” on page 116.
5. Install the replacement module into the rack. See “Installing the Module into a rack” on page 118.
6. Replace the components and cables. See “Replacing the Module components and cables” on page 118.
7. Connect the power cords, power on the library, and complete “Verifying Library Module installation
and configuration” on page 118.
8. Replace the tape cartridges.

You need a T-10 Torx screwdriver to remove the drive bay covers and a small flat head screwdriver. Have
several static safe bags available for the boards that are moved to the replacement chassis.

Before the replacement procedure is begun

v Ensure that the rack is level side to side and front to back.
v Verify that any applications that are using the library are idle.

Attention: If the temperature in the room where the replacement module is installed varies by 15 C (59
F) from the room where it was stored, allow it to acclimate to the surrounding environment for at least 12
hours before it is unpacked from the shipping container.

Saving the configuration

See “Locating Management functions” on page 63 for instructions on saving configuration settings to a
file or an FAT32 formatted USB flash drive with the Management GUI or with the Operator Panel. This
action is needed only for the Base chassis module and only as an extra safety precaution for both chassis
and controller card replacement.

Note: Do not do a Save Configuration on a library that is in a failed state. Save the configuration on a
working library only.

Removing the magazines and cartridges

For detailed instructions, see “Locating Management functions” on page 63 to open the magazines.

Note: As a best practice, complete this procedure while applications are idle. While the magazine is
pulled or removed, the library robotic assembly cannot move media.

Powering off the library

Power off the library from the front panel. Depress Power and hold it for 5 seconds. If the library does
not complete a soft shutdown, depress and hold Power for 10 seconds.

114 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Important: Under normal circumstances, when the library is powered off by using the front Power, the
robot automatically parks and locks into the Base Module behind the Operator Panel. If you are given a
choice during the power down procedure, choose the default park position. To protect the spooling cable
or other sensitive parts, the accessor must be in the Base Module before any modules are removed from
the library. If it is not, follow the procedure for returning the accessor to the base module. See “Returning
the accessor to the Base Module” on page 132.

Verify that all host processes are idle.

Removing the Module cables

1. Remove the power cords from the module that is replaced.
2. Remove the expansion interconnect cables (▌1▐) from the module that is replaced and from the
modules that are connected to it.

Figure 60. Interconnect cables

Note: Completely removing the cables from both ends prevents damaging the expansion interconnect
cables during module removal and replacement.
3. Remove any SAS, FC, or Ethernet cables from the module that is replaced.
4. Remove the USB device, if present.

Removing the tape drives

Remove any tape drives from the module that is replaced. The library tracks the drive locations and
issues events if the drives aren't in the expected locations. Note the drive locations so they can be
replaced in the same order and drive bays.
1. Use your fingers to loosen the blue captive thumbscrews on the tape drive.
2. Pull straight back on the tape drive handle while the bottom of the drive is supported to remove it
from the module.

Upgrading and servicing 115

Attention: Support the bottom of the tape drive when it is removed to avoid damaging any of the
internal connections.

Removing the power supplies

While the power supplies are removed, be sure to support the bottom. For detailed instructions, see
“Adding, removing, or replacing a power supply” on page 119.

Removing the Base or Expansion controller card

For detailed instructions, see “Replacing a Base or Expansion controller card” on page 122.

Removing the Module from a rack

Obtain assistance to lift and stabilize the module during removal and replacement.
v If you are removing a module that has a module immediately above or below it,
1. From the front of the library, use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws two full turns on
the module and its adjacent modules.
2. From the back of the library, unlock the alignment mechanisms that connect the module with the
adjacent modules.

Note: If a blue alignment lever lock is attached to the rear of the module, slide it to the left, then
move the alignment lever. The lever lock has an internal spring, so hold it while the alignment
lever is moved, and it automatically springs back into place after the lever is moved. See Figure 41
on page 48.

Figure 61. Unlocking or disengaging the alignment lever

From the front of the library, use a #2 Phillips screwdriver and your fingers to loosen the captive
thumbscrews screws two full turns on the module to be removed (circled in Figure 62 on page 117). Then,
slide the module out of the rack.

116 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figure 62. Loosening the thumbscrews

Figure 63. Sliding the module out of the rack

Moving the library cover plates

Unpack the replacement module and place it on a sturdy work surface. Save the packaging materials to
return the empty module.

The Base Module has removable top and bottom cover plates. The two covers are identical and the
process for removing and installing them is the same for the top and bottom of the module. See
“Preparing top and bottom modules” on page 40 for details. While this procedure refers to moving a
cover from the Base Module, the information is the same for moving a cover from an Expansion Module.
The covers must be removed only if the failed unit does not have the covers (the cover is on another
module).

The replacement module is shipped with a bottom cover plate but not a top cover plate. Move the cover
plates as necessary so the replacement module has the cover plates in the same location as the empty

Upgrading and servicing 117

module and the empty module has a bottom cover plate.

Installing the Module into a rack

See “Installing modules in a rack” on page 43 for details.

Replacing the Module components and cables

Replace the module components by reversing the removal procedures. Align the components carefully in
the guide slots and tighten thumbscrews only with your fingers. If the thumbscrews cannot be tightened
easily, verify that the component is aligned properly.
1. Replace the controller card. See “Replacing a Base or Expansion controller card” on page 122.
2. Replace the tape drives in the same locations.

Tip: To help align the drive, remove the drive bay covers for one drive at a time.
See “Adding, removing, or replacing a tape drive” on page 110.
3. Replace the magazines in the same locations.
4. Replace the power supplies. See “Adding, removing, or replacing a power supply” on page 119.
5. Reattach any SAS, FC, expansion interconnect, and Ethernet cables that was removed earlier.
6. Reinsert the USB device if you removed it earlier.
7. Reattach the power cords.

Verifying Library Module installation and configuration

v Power on the library.
v Verify that the library initializes correctly and that the status is Ready.
v Run Library Verify to verify that the replacement module is visible in the Operator Panel or
Management GUI.
v If a module was replaced, validate the library configuration in the Management GUI at Library >
Logical Libraries.
v Properly complete the Repair Identification (RID) tag that was included with the replacement module.

Note: A RID (Repair Identification) tag maintains the original serial number record of the module to
ensure your warranty coverage, if applicable, is not interrupted. The tag is important for customer
inventory accuracy. Follow the instructions on the RID tag precisely.
– Copy the serial number of the defective module onto the RID tag.
– Apply the tag to the front of the new replacement module.

118 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figure 64. Placement of the RID tag (Base Module shown)

v If a module was added, you must reset your logical libraries by using the basic logical library wizard.
See “Locating Management functions” on page 63 to find and run the basic logical library wizard.

Adding, removing, or replacing a power supply

CAUTION:

Static Sensitive

Risk of damage to devices

v A discharge of static electricity damages static-sensitive devices or micro
circuitry.
v Proper packaging and grounding techniques are necessary precautions
to prevent damage.

Upgrading and servicing 119

Removing the power supply

Figure 65. Power supplies

Table 44. Power supply components

▌1▐ Blue captive thumbscrews
▌2▐ White, lit if the AC power is connected
▌3▐ AC power outlet
▌4▐ Green, lit if the module in turned on

1. Locate the failed power supply on the rear of the library by the UID LEDs notification, and also by
the power supply LEDs; either the green LED (▌4▐) is lit or both LEDs are unlit.
2. Unplug the AC power cord (▌3▐) from the power supply you are replacing.
3. Loosen the two blue captive thumbscrews (▌1▐) with your fingers on the power supply.
4. Using the thumbscrews (one on each side), slowly pull the power supply approximately 10 cm (4
inches) from the back of the module.
5. Use one hand to completely remove the power supply from the module, while the other hand is used
to support the bottom.

120 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Adding or replacing the power supply

Figure 66. Sliding in the new power supply

1. Position the new power supply onto the alignment rails (▌1▐).
2. Slide the power supply into the module until it is flush with the back panel of the module.
3. Tighten the blue captive thumbscrews (▌2▐) with your fingers to secure it to the module.
4. Attach the AC power cord to the new power supply (▌3▐) and plug the power cord into an outlet.

Installing a secondary power supply

1. Position the secondary power supply onto the alignment rails. Note the positions of the primary vs.
the secondary power supplies - top vs. middle bay.
2. Slide the power supply into the module until it is flush with the back panel of the module.
3. Tighten the blue captive thumbscrews with your fingers to secure it to the module.
4. Attach the AC power cord to the new secondary power supply.

Verifying the power supply installation and operation

1. Verify that the new power supply is operating properly by checking the power supply LEDs.
v The white (▌2▐ in Figure 65 on page 120) LED is lit.
v The green (▌4▐ in Figure 65 on page 120) LED is unlit.
With the Operator Panel or Management GUI, confirm that the power supply is operating correctly.
The event that indicated that the power supply was faulty is cleared.
2. If the UID LEDs are still illuminated, deactivate them by using the Operator Panel or Management
GUI.

Upgrading and servicing 121

Replacing a Base or Expansion controller card
CAUTION:
v Parts can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Keep parts in
electrostatic containers until needed. Ensure that you are properly
grounded when static sensitive components are touched.
v You must power off the library to install or replace this part or damage
can occur.

Important: Do not replace both the base chassis and the Base Module controller card with repair
components in the same procedure. The firmware does not allow the library to operate if both
components are replaced at the same time. Critical library information is saved in the controller card and
within the chassis. When one is replaced, the data from the original component is transferred to the
repair component. If both the base chassis and Base Module controller are replaced, you must power
cycle the library between component replacements.

Saving the configuration

See “Locating Management functions” on page 63 for instructions on saving configuration settings to a
file with the Management GUI or with the Operator Panel. This procedure is done when a Base Module
controller card is replaced, or as an extra precaution when both the controller card and the module are
replaced.

Note: Do not do a Save Configuration on a library that is in a failed state. Save the configuration on a
working library only.

Powering off the library

Verify that all host processes are idle, then power off the library from the front panel. Depress Power and
hold it for 5 seconds. If the library does not complete a soft shutdown, depress and hold Power for 10
seconds.

Important: Under normal circumstances, when the library is powered off by using the front Power, the
robot automatically parks and locks into the Base Module behind the Operator Panel. If you are given a
choice during the power down procedure, choose the default park position. To protect the spooling cable
or other sensitive parts, the accessor must be in the Base Module before any modules or drives are
removed from the library. If it is not, follow the procedure for returning the accessor to the base module.
See “Returning the accessor to the Base Module” on page 132.

122 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Removing the controller card

Figure 67. Controller card components

Note: The base controller card is on the left, and the expansion controller card is on the right.
Table 45. Controller card components
▌1▐ Blue captive thumbscrews
▌2▐ Upper Expansion Module connection port
▌3▐ USB Port
▌4▐ Ethernet Port A
▌5▐ Ethernet Port B
▌6▐ Lower Expansion Module connection port
▌7▐ Controller card LEDs, top to bottom
v Green Controller Health Status. The flashing LED indicates that the controller is in
good health status and properly working.
v Yellow Controller Error. This LED turns on if the controller has a hardware issue. In
this case, the green LED stops flashing.
v Blue Unit Identifier. This LED is a beacon that can be turned on or off through the
Management GUI. The LED gives the user an indication that the controller needs
attention. See “Identifying a failed component” on page 73.

1. Unplug the AC power cables from the module that contains the failed controller card.
2. On the module that contains the failed controller card, remove the expansion interconnect cables (▌2▐
and ▌6▐) that connect to other modules, if present.

Upgrading and servicing 123

3. Remove the Ethernet cables (▌4▐ and ▌5▐) and the USB cable (▌3▐), if present. (An Expansion Module
does not have Ethernet or USB ports. See Figure 67 on page 123).
4. Loosen the two blue captive thumbscrews (▌1▐) on the controller.
5. Using the thumbscrews, slowly remove the controller from the module.

Installing the Base or Expansion controller card

Figure 68. Installing a Controller card

Important: Base and Expansion Module controller cards are keyed to fit in their respective modules only.
A Base Module controller card does not fit into an Expansion Module, and vice versa. If you encounter
resistance when the controller card is installed, make sure that you are installing the controller card into
the appropriate module.
1. Position the new controller card on the alignment rails.
2. Slide the controller card slowly into the module until it is flush with the back panel of the module.
3. Tighten the blue captive thumbscrews (▌1▐) with your fingers to secure it to the module.
4. Replace the expansion interconnect cables (▌2▐ and ▌6▐), the Ethernet cable or cables (▌4▐ and ▌5▐),
and the USB cable (▌3▐) that were removed previously. (An Expansion Module does not have Ethernet
or USB ports. See Figure 67 on page 123).
5. Plug in the AC power cables.

Powering on the library

Power on the library by pressing Power on the Base Module just below the Operator Panel. The green
light illuminates. When the library is powered on, it inventories the tape cartridges in the magazines,
checks the firmware version on all modules, configures the tape drives, confirms the presence of the
existing modules, and searches for any new modules.

Verifying the Base or Expansion controller card

1. Verify that the library has the most up-to-date firmware revision. To find the version of firmware that
is installed on the library, check the Library Properties page of the Management GUI or the Status >
Library page of the Operator Panel.
2. If the Base Module controller is replaced, upgrade the firmware if necessary. Update the firmware
from the Management GUI at Library > Actions > Update Library Firmware.

Important: If you are asked whether to retain the serial number, always select Yes.
3. Check the Attention light on the front panel and login to web interface and check the dashboard for
any alerts.

124 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
4. With the Operator Panel or the Management GUI, check for any events. The event that indicated that
the controller was faulty is cleared.
5. If the base module controller is replaced, the library configuration is automatically restored. Validate
the library configuration, and complete a Restore if the library configuration was not restored.
6. If the UID LEDs are still illuminated, deactivate them by using the Operator Panel or Management
GUI.
7. Resume the host applications.

Installing, removing, or replacing an accessor and spooling

mechanism
CAUTION:
Parts can be damaged by electrostatic discharge. Keep parts in electrostatic
containers until needed. Ensure that you are properly grounded when
static sensitive components are touched.

Powering off the library

Verify that all host processes are idle, then power off the library from the front panel. Depress Power and
hold it for 5 seconds. If the library does not complete a soft shutdown, depress and hold Power for 10
seconds.

Important: Under normal circumstances, when the library is powered off by using the front Power, the
robot automatically parks and locks into the Base Module behind the Operator Panel. If you are given a
choice during the power down procedure, choose the default park position. To protect the spooling cable
or other sensitive parts, the accessor must be in the Base Module before any components are removed
from the library. If it is not, follow the procedure for returning the accessor to the base module. See
“Returning the accessor to the Base Module” on page 132.

Preparing to remove the accessor and spooling mechanism from the Base Module
Note:

When a module is extended from the library - to reduce the risk of personal
injury or damage to equipment
v Extend the rack-leveling jacks to the floor.
v Ensure that the full weight of the rack rests on the leveling jacks.
v Verify that the rack is level side to side and front to back.
v Install the rack stabilizer kit on the rack.
v Extend only one rack component at a time. Racks can become unstable if
more than one component is extended.

1. Loosen the front captive screws that connect the Base Module to the rack two full turns.
2. If adjacent Expansion Modules exist
a. Loosen the front captive screws two full turns on the adjacent expansion modules.
b. Unlock the alignment lever.
c. Disconnect and completely remove the expansion interconnect cables from the Base Module and
from the adjacent modules. Removing the expansion interconnect cables completely prevents
damaging the cables when the module is moved in and out of the rack.
3. Disconnect the power supply cables on the Base Module.
4. Disconnect the Ethernet, SAS, and Fibre Channel cables from the Base Module.

Upgrading and servicing 125

5. Completely loosen the front captive screws of the Base Module.
6. Slowly extend the Base Module from the front of the rack and remove it from the rack.
7. Place the Base Module on a flat, level surface, such as a table.
8. Remove the top library cover plate, if present.
a. Unlock the top cover with two small screwdrivers.
b. Remove the cover from the module.

Removing the accessor and spooling mechanism from the Base Module
1. Remove the left and right magazines by using the magazine release levers (circled in Figure 69).
Push up on the lever, then pull the magazine out.

Figure 69. Magazine release levers

2. Slide the cartridge carrier toward the center of the accessor to access the robot-locking lever.
3. Standing at the front of the module, unlock the robot by moving the blue lever to the left, then
toward you, then to the right.

126 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figure 70. Unlocking the robot

4. Place your fingers into the large holes on the accessor and pull up slowly.

Note: The accessor offers resistance. Lift the accessor no faster than 12 mm (0.5 inches) per second.

Figure 71. Finger holes

5. Lift the accessor gently from the module and place it on top of the gear mechanism. Take care not to
damage the spooling cable.
6. Lock the robot to keep it from lowering
7. On the top of the accessor where the spooling cable is attached, press down on the latch (▌1▐ in
Figure 72 on page 128), then tilt out the piece that holds the spooling cable (▌2▐).

Upgrading and servicing 127

 Note: Note where the end of the spooling cable pivots in the accessor. It is important to know when
you attach the new spooling cable to the accessor. See ▌2▐ in Figure 73 on page 129.
8. Lift the spooling cable from the accessor and place it in its cradle at the top of the spooling
mechanism (▌3▐ in Figure 72).

Figure 72. Unlocking the spooling cable and placing it in its cradle

9. Place the spooling connector (▌1▐ in Figure 73 on page 129) to the park position.

128 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figure 73. Spooling cable in park position

10. Unlock the lever and set aside the accessor. See Figure 70 on page 127.

Important: If a tape cartridge is still in the cartridge carrier, remove the cartridge by lifting it
straight up. You might need to move the cartridge slightly from side to side.
11. If the spooling mechanism needs to be replaced, refer to “Removing or replacing a spooling
mechanism” on page 134.

Installing the accessor into the Base Module

1. Each corner of the accessor has a gear with two protruding pins. Rotate one of the gears on the
accessor so that the two pins are aligned horizontally. See Figure 74 on page 130

Upgrading and servicing 129

Figure 74. Pins are aligned horizontally

2. The accessor is shipped with the robot in the unlocked position. Verify that the replacement unit is
locked, then set it on top of the gears.
3. Place the gears of the accessor into the grooves on the inside corners of the module. Confirm that all
four of the pins are touching the outside of the grooves.
4. Standing at the right side of the module, remove the end of the spooling cable from the park position.
5. Place the spooling cable into the grooves where it attaches to the accessor and rotate it until it snaps
into place. See Figure 75 on page 131.

130 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figure 75. Installing the spooling cable

6. Unlock the accessor. The accessor drops smoothly. If it does not, check the alignment of the gears.
7. Before the accessor gets to the bottom, lock the robot. Standing at the front of the module, move the
blue lever to the left, then away from you, then to the right.

Tip: If the end of the spooling cable drops into the module, unlock the accessor, remove it from the
module, return the end of the spooling cable to its cradle, return the accessor to its previous position
in the module, relock the accessor, and repeat the procedure.

After the accessor and spooling mechanism installation

1. Push the magazines back into the module until they lock into place.
2. Replace the top cover on the Base Module if you removed one.
3. Slide the module into the rack.
4. If no adjacent modules exist, tighten the front screws.
5. If adjacent modules exist
a. Set the alignment mechanisms to the lock position. If you encounter resistance, adjust the upper
module so the pin in the alignment mechanism moves into the hole in the lower module.
b. When the alignment mechanism is in the locked position, tighten the front screws on the module
c. Reconnect the expansion interconnect cables.
6. Reconnect the Ethernet, SAS, and Fibre Channel cables to the Base Module.
7. Reconnect the power supply cables to the Base Module.
8. Pack the failed accessor and spooling mechanism to return to your service.

Upgrading and servicing 131

Powering on the library
1. Power on the library by pressing Power on the Base Module just below the Operator Panel for 5
seconds.
2. The green light illuminates.
3. When the library is powered on, it inventories the tape cartridges in the magazines, checks the
firmware version on all modules, configures the tape drives, confirms the presence of the existing
modules, and searches for any new modules.

Verifying the installation

1. Verify that the library powers on and initializes correctly, and that the status is Ready.
2. If the UID LEDs are still illuminated, deactivate them by using the Operator Panel or Management
GUI.
3. Run Library Verify to ensure the library is working correctly.

Returning the accessor to the Base Module

If you powered off the library and the accessor did not return to its park position
in the Base Module behind the Operator Panel.
1. Power on the library by pressing Power on the Base Module just below the Operator Panel.
2. Return the accessor to its park position.
3. Power off the library by pressing Power on the Base Module and holding for 5 seconds.

If the accessor is still not in the Base Module, use one of the procedures in the following two sections.

If the accessor is stopped in an Expansion Module that is near the Base Module or
is stopped directly between two modules.
1. Remove the front bezel from the Base Module, the Expansion Module containing the accessor, and
modules in between as needed.
2. Insert a small flat head screwdriver into the screwdriver relief on the right rear bearing block of the
accessor.

132 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figure 76. Inserting the screwdriver to manually operate the accessor

3. Turn the screwdriver to manually operate the accessor gear train and move the accessor into the Base
Module.
4. Lock the accessor. Standing at the front of the module, move the blue lever to the left, then away from
you, then to the right.
5. Reinstall the bezels that were previously removed.
6. Remove the accessor and spooling mechanism. See “Preparing to remove the accessor and spooling
mechanism from the Base Module” on page 125.
7. Install the new accessor and spooling mechanism. See “Installing the accessor into the Base Module”
on page 129.
8. Slide the Base Module back into the rack. See “After the accessor and spooling mechanism
installation” on page 131.

If the accessor is stopped in an Expansion Module that is not near the Base
Module or it cannot move vertically.
1. Remove the left magazine of the Base Module. See “Removing or replacing a magazine” on page
138. The library must already be powered off. Therefore, you must unlock the magazine by using the
manual release.
2. Disconnect the power supply cables from all of the modules.
3. Using plastic-handled scissors, reach through the left magazine opening of the Base Module and
carefully cut the spooling cable.

Upgrading and servicing 133

Figure 77. Left magazine opening

4. Extend the expansion module that contains the accessor while carefully guiding the free spooling
cable. See “Preparing to remove the accessor and spooling mechanism from the Base Module” on
page 125. While minor differences might occur, these instructions for a Base Module also apply to an
Expansion Module.
5. Remove the accessor from the Expansion Module by using Step 1 through Step 7 in “Removing the
accessor and spooling mechanism from the Base Module” on page 126.
6. Slide the Expansion Module back into the rack. See “After the accessor and spooling mechanism
installation” on page 131. While minor differences might occur, these instructions for a Base Module
also apply to an Expansion Module.
7. Extend the Base Module. See “Preparing to remove the accessor and spooling mechanism from the
Base Module” on page 125.
8. Remove the spooling mechanism from the Base Module by using Step 8 through Step 10 in
“Removing the accessor and spooling mechanism from the Base Module” on page 126.
9. Install the new accessor and spooling mechanism. See “Installing the accessor into the Base Module”
on page 129.
10. Slide the Base Module back into the rack. See “After the accessor and spooling mechanism
installation” on page 131.

Removing or replacing a spooling mechanism

Occasionally, only the robotic spooling cable must be removed and replaced. See “Identifying a failed
component” on page 73.
1. Power down the library.

Important: Under normal circumstances, when the library is powered off by using the front Power,
the robot automatically parks and locks into the Base Module behind the Operator Panel. If you are
given a choice during the power down procedure, choose the default park position. To protect the
spooling cable or other sensitive parts, the accessor must be in the Base Module before any
components are removed from the library. If it is not, follow the procedure for returning the accessor
to the base module. See “Returning the accessor to the Base Module” on page 132.
2. Refer to “Preparing to remove the accessor and spooling mechanism from the Base Module” on page
125 for the steps in preparing your library.
3. Remove the left magazine to provide clear access to the spooling mechanism.

134 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
4. Follow the steps in “Removing the accessor and spooling mechanism from the Base Module” on page
126 to remove the accessor, disconnect the spooling cable, and place it in the park position.
5. Push down on the lever on the top of the spooling mechanism (▌1▐) and slide about 10 mm towards
the center (▌2▐) to unlock the mechanism.

Figure 78. Unlocking the spooling mechanism

Note: Make sure that the spooling mechanism is unlocked before you try to pull it out. When the
mechanism is unlocked, the cutout behind the mechanism is covered, and the mechanism cannot slide
any further to the center.

Upgrading and servicing 135

Figure 79. Unlocked spooling mechanism - enlarged view

136 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figure 80. Locked spooling mechanism - enlarged view

6. Pull the spooling mechanism towards the front of the module to remove it.

Upgrading and servicing 137

Figure 81. Removing the spooling mechanism

7. Reverse the steps to replace the failed spooling mechanism with the new unit.
8. Follow the steps in “Installing the accessor into the Base Module” on page 129 and “After the accessor
and spooling mechanism installation” on page 131 to put the library back into service.

Removing or replacing a magazine

It is recommended that you unlock the magazine with the Operator Panel, Management GUI, or the
release button on the front panel. If these methods fail, or if a magazine needs to be removed when the
power to the device is off, you can release the magazine manually. Only one magazine or I/O station can
be open at a time.

Note: This procedure is completed more effectively while applications are idle. While the magazine is
extended, the library robotic assembly cannot move media.
1. Log in as an administrator.
2. Go to Library > Modules and Magazines.

138 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
3. On the Actions menu, click Unlock Magazine.
4. Click Open in the left or right magazine column within the module that contains the magazine to be
opened.
5. A message box indicates when the magazine is unlocked.
6. Unlock Magazine screen shows that the magazine is now unlocked.

Note: If not removed, the magazine and the I/O station relock after 30 seconds.

To manually eject the magazine, insert a paper clip or a small flat head screwdriver into the appropriate
magazine release hole and gently push the tab in. See Figure 82 and Figure 83.
1. Open the magazine access door.
2. Insert a paper clip or a small flat head screwdriver into the appropriate magazine release hole and
gently push the tab in.

Figure 82. Manually releasing the right magazine

Figure 83. Manually releasing the left magazine

3. Pull the magazines out of the module.

Upgrading and servicing 139

Moving the library modules
When a library module is moved within the rack, to a different rack, or in a rack to a different physical
location, care must be taken to avoid personal injury and damage to the module.

Note:

Product Weight

Caution: The weight of this part or unit is between 18.1 and 33.6 kg (40 and
74 lb). It takes two persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C009)

Caution: The weight of this part or unit is between 33.6 and 46.3 kg (74 and
102 lb). It takes three persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C010)

Risk of personal injury

Before a module is moved or lifted:

v Observe local health and safety requirements and guidelines for manual
material handling.
v Remove all tapes to reduce the weight and to prevent cartridges from
falling into the robotics path and damaging the library.
v Remove all tape drives to reduce the weight.
v Obtain adequate assistance to lift and stabilize the module during
installation or removal.

Risk of damage to devices

When a module is placed into or removed from a rack:

v Extend the rack’s leveling jacks to the floor.
v Ensure that the full weight of the rack rests on the leveling jacks.
v Install stabilizing feet on the rack.
v Extend only one rack component at a time.

Important: Under normal circumstances, when the library is powered off by using the front Power, the
robot automatically parks and locks into the Base Module behind the Operator Panel. If you are given a
choice during the power down procedure, choose the default park position. To protect the spooling cable
or other sensitive parts, the accessor must be in the Base Module before any drives are removed from the
library.

To move a module within a rack or into a different rack:

1. Save the library configuration.
2. Remove the tape cartridges from the tape drives and magazines, and power off the library.
3. Disconnect the power cords and cables, and unlock the alignment mechanisms.
Attention: Failure to disconnect all cables can result to damage to the cable or the mating electronic
assembly in the library.
4. Remove the modules from the rack.
5. Remove the rack rails from the rack.
6. Verify that the destination rack is level side to side and front to back.
7. Install the rack rails in the destination rack.
8. Install the modules in the rack.
9. Replace the cables and lock the alignment mechanisms.

140 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
10. Connect the power cords, power on the library, and verify the operation.
11. Replace the tape cartridges.

For instructions for these steps, see “Adding or replacing a Base or Expansion Module” on page 113 and
“Installing” on page 35.

Upgrading and servicing 141

142 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Appendix A. Library Configuration Forms
Make a copy of these forms, and fill them out as you are installing and configuring your library.

Update the forms each time that changes are made to the library configuration and store these forms in a
secure location. Having the information on these forms are helpful if a call to IBM® service is necessary.

You can also save library configuration data from the Management GUI. See “Locating Management
functions” on page 63.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 143

Library information
General Information
Library type TS4300 (MT 3555)
Serial Number
Host name
SNTP server
Encryption License Key
Path Failover License Key
Network Settings
Domain Name
Network Protocol IPv4/IPv6
Max. Link Speed
Method
IP Address
Gateway
DNS1
DNS2
Security Settings
Password Policy
SSL
Certificates
LDAP Server (See also User Accounts)
LDAP Domain
Encryption Settings
Encryption Key Manager Server 1/Port
Encryption Key Manager Server 2/Port
Notification Settings
SMTP Notification Level
SMTP Server/Port
SMTP Security
SMTP Email Address
SNMP Community Name
SNMP Notification Level
SNMP Server/Port 1
SNMP Server/Port 2

144 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Module and drive information
Make a copy of this page, for more than 2 modules.

Number
Number of Power Supplies
I/O Station Enabled
Drive 1 (bottom slot) Type
-- Serial Number
-- Logical Library Number/Control Path
-- Port Settings (FC only)
Drive 2 (middle slot) Type
-- Serial Number
-- Logical Library Number/Control Path
-- Port Settings (FC only)
Drive 3 (top slot) Type
-- Serial Number
-- Logical Library Number/Control Path
-- Port Settings (FC only)

Number
Number of Power Supplies
I/O Station Enabled
Drive 1 (bottom slot) Type
-- Serial Number
-- Logical Library Number/Control Path
-- Port Settings (FC only)
Drive 2 (middle slot) Type
-- Serial Number
-- Logical Library Number/Control Path
-- Port Settings (FC only)
Drive 3 (top slot) Type
-- Serial Number
-- Logical Library Number/Control Path
-- Port Settings (FC only)

Appendix A. Library Configuration Forms 145

 Logical Library information
Make a copy of this page, for more than 3 logical libraries.

Number
Name
Number of Drives
Number of Slots
Number of I/O Slots
Barcode Label Length Rep to Host
Barcode Label Alignment Rep to Host
Auto Clean
Key Manager Type
LTO7 Multi-Initiator SCSI Conflict Detection
| Sequential Mode

Number
Name
Number of Drives
Number of Slots
Number of I/O Slots
Barcode Label Length Rep to Host
Barcode Label Alignment Rep to Host
Auto Clean
Key Manager Type
LTO7 Multi-Initiator SCSI Conflict Detection
| Sequential Mode

Number
Name
Number of Drives
Number of Slots
Number of I/O Slots
Barcode Label Length Rep to Host
Barcode Label Alignment Rep to Host
Auto Clean
Key Manager Type
LTO7 Multi-Initiator SCSI Conflict Detection
| Sequential Mode

146 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Users account information
The default user names, roles, and passwords are listed in the table. Add any user names, their roles, and
passwords that are created.

User name Role Password

Administrator Administrator adm001
User Monitor <none>
Superuser SuperUser sup001
Service Service

Appendix A. Library Configuration Forms 147

148 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Appendix B. LTO media
This section provides an overview of LTO media, which is recommended for use with this library.

To ensure that your IBM tape drive conforms to IBM's specifications for reliability, use only IBM LTO
tape cartridges. You might use other LTO-certified data cartridges, but they might not meet the standards
of reliability that are established by IBM. The IBM LTO data cartridge cannot be interchanged with the
media used in other IBM non-LTO tape products.

Figure 84 shows the IBM LTO data cartridge and its components.

▌1▐ LTO cartridge memory ▌4▐ Write-protect Switch

▌2▐ Cartridge door ▌5▐ Label area
▌3▐ Leader pin ▌6▐ Insertion guide

Figure 84. The IBM LTO data cartridge

Note: The same components are on all the IBM LTO data cartridges.

Data cartridges
Use the LTO data and cleaning tape cartridges that are designed for your model of library.

You can order tape cartridges with the bar code labels included, or you can order custom labels. To
obtain tape cartridges and bar code labels, see “Ordering media supplies” on page 166.

When tape is processed in the cartridges, LTO Tape Drives use a linear, serpentine recording format. The
native data capacity and recording format of LTO data cartridges is as follows:
Table 46. Cartridge data capacity and recording formats
Type Native Data Capacity Recording Format
LTO8 12 TB (30 TB at 2.5:1 compression) Reads and writes data on 6656 tracks,
32 tracks at a time.
LTO M8 9 TB (22.5 TB at 2.5:1 compression)1 Reads and writes data on 3584 tracks,
32 tracks at a time.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 149

Table 46. Cartridge data capacity and recording formats (continued)
Type Native Data Capacity Recording Format
LTO7 6 TB (15 TB at 2.5:1 compression) Reads and writes data on 3584 tracks,
32 tracks at a time.
LTO6 2.5 TB (6.25 TB at 2.5:1 compression) Reads and writes data on 2176 tracks,
16 tracks at a time.
1
See “Minimum firmware levels for common library features” on page v for minimum firmware levels for LTO M8
media.

The first set of tracks is written from near the beginning of the tape to near the end of the tape. The head
then repositions to the next set of tracks for the return pass. This process continues until all tracks are
written and the cartridge is full, or until all data is written.

The cartridge door (▌2▐ in Figure 84 on page 149) protects the tape from contamination when the
cartridge is out of the drive. The tape is attached to a leader pin (▌3▐ in Figure 84 on page 149) behind
the door. When the cartridge is inserted into the drive, a threading mechanism pulls the pin (and tape)
out of the cartridge, across the drive head, and onto a non-removable take-up reel. The head can then
read or write data from or to the tape.

The write-protect switch (▌4▐ in Figure 84 on page 149) prevents data from being written to the tape
cartridge. For more information, see “Write-Protect switch” on page 155.

The label area (▌5▐ in Figure 84 on page 149) provides a location to place a label. See “Labeling tape
cartridges” on page 153.

The insertion guide (▌6▐ in Figure 84 on page 149) is a large, notched area that prevents the cartridge
from being inserted incorrectly.
Table 47. Nominal cartridge life: Load/unload cycles
Type Load/Unload Cycles
LTO8 20,000 (20k)
LTO M8 20,000 (20k)
LTO7 20,000 (20k)
LTO6 20,000 (20k)

Cartridge Read/Write compatibility

Table 48. Data cartridge compatibility with LTO tape drive

IBM LTO Tape IBM LTO Data Cartridges

Drive LTO 8 LTO M8 1
LTO 7 LTO 6 LTO 5 LTO 4
LTO8 tape Read/Write Read/Write Read/Write
drive
LTO7 tape Read/Write Read/Write Read only
drive
LTO6 tape Read/Write Read/Write Read only
drive
1
See “Minimum firmware levels for common library features” on page v for minimum firmware levels for M8
media.

150 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
LTO Type M Cartridge (M8)
The LTO Program introduced a new capability with LTO8 tape drives: the ability to write 9 TB (native)
on a brand new LTO Ultrium 7 cartridge instead of 6 TB (native) as specified by the LTO 7 format. Such
a cartridge is called an LTO 7 initialized LTO Type M cartridge. These LTO Type M cartridges are
identifiable by using an automation bar code label that ends with the last 2 characters “M8”.
Table 49. LTO Cartridge Types
Cartridge
Cartridge/Density Packaging/Silkscreen Tape Drive
type Bar code label labeling Native capacity compatibility
L8 xxxxxxL8 LTO Ultrium 8 12 TB LTO 8
M8 xxxxxxM8 LTO Ultrium 7 9 TB LTO 8
L7 xxxxxxL7 LTO Ultrium 7 6 TB LTO 7, LTO 8

From now on, these cartridges are referred to as L8, M8, and L7.

Only new, unused LTO Ultrium 7 cartridges can be initialized as M8 cartridges. When a cartridge is
initialized as M8, it cannot be changed back to L7. Initialized M8 cartridges can be written and read only
in an LTO 8 tape drive; LTO7 tape drives cannot read initialized M8 cartridges.

M8 cartridges can be purchased as either preinitialized (also referred to as “labeled and initialized”) M8
data cartridges or uninitialized M8 data cartridges (M8 WORM cartridges are not supported). For either
option, the bar code label is included. However, the uninitialized M8 data cartridge must first be
initialized in tape libraries that support the automatic initialization of uninitialized M8 cartridges while
under the control of ISV applications that recognize the “M8” bar code label.

A tape cartridge is initialized when it is first loaded into a compatible tape drive and data is written by
the ISV application at the beginning of tape (sometimes referred to as "labeling a tape" or "writing from
BOT"). The tape drive then establishes the density of the media.

If an uninitialized M8 cartridge is not initialized in a tape library that supports uninitialized M8

cartridges, then the cartridge might inadvertently and silently be initialized at the L7 density (that is, at a
6 TB native capacity) even if the bar code label states “M8”. This action might occur with the usage of
non-TS4300 tape libraries, stand-alone LTO7 tape drives, stand-alone LTO8 tape drives, earlier LTO8 tape
drive firmware, earlier TS4300 library firmware, or earlier ISV software that does not recognize that M8
cartridges must be mounted only in LTO8 tape drives. M8 cartridges that are inadvertently initialized at
the L7 density can continue to be read and written in LTO7 and LTO8 tape drives. However, they remain
limited to the 6 TB native capacity.

TS4300 Tape Library firmware version [Link]-B00 added support for uninitialized M8 cartridges, in
addition to support for preinitialized M8 cartridges. In any tape product with M8 cartridges, the
minimum LTO8 tape drive firmware version is HB82.

Note: See “Minimum firmware levels for common library features” on page v for minimum firmware
levels for LTO M8 media.

Capacity scaling
To control the capacity of the cartridge (for example, to obtain a faster seek time) issue the SCSI
command SET CAPACITY. For information about this command, see the IBM Ultrium Tape Drive SCSI
Reference.

Appendix B. LTO media 151

WORM (Write Once, Read Many) cartridges
Certain records retention and data security applications require a Write Once, Read Many (WORM)
method for storing data on tape. LTO drives that are supported by the library enable WORM support
when a WORM tape cartridge is loaded into the drive.

WORM media
Because standard read/write media are incompatible with the WORM feature, a specially formatted
WORM tape cartridge (see Figure 85) is required. Each WORM cartridge has a unique, worldwide
cartridge identifier (WWCID), which comprises the unique CM chip serial number and the unique tape
media serial number. Ultrium 8 WORM media are two-tone burgundy and silvery gray. See “Ordering
media supplies” on page 166 for information about how to choose and purchase the appropriate WORM
tape cartridges for your tape drive.

Note: All IBM drive firmware allows the use of WORM media.

Figure 85. LTO Data and WORM tape cartridges

Data security on WORM media

Certain built-in security measures help ensure that the data that is written on a WORM cartridge do not
become compromised. For example
v The format of a WORM Tape Cartridge is unlike that of standard read/write media. This unique
format prevents a drive that lacks WORM-capable firmware from writing on a WORM tape cartridge.
For LTO 8, native data capacity is 12000 GB and compressed data capacity is 30000 GB.
v When the drive senses a WORM cartridge, the firmware prohibits the changing or altering of user data
that is already written on the tape. The firmware tracks the last appendable point on the tape.

WORM media errors

The following conditions cause WORM media errors to occur.
v Information in the servo manufacturer's word (SMW) on the tape must match information from the
cartridge memory (CM) module in the cartridge. If it does not match, a media Error Code 7 posts on
the drive's single-character display (SCD).
v Inserting a WORM tape cartridge into a drive that is not compatible with WORM causes the cartridge
to be treated as an unsupported medium. The drive reports a media Error Code 7.

WORM requirements
To add WORM capability to your IBM LTO drives, you must use either IBM LTO 8 12000 GB WORM
tape cartridges, IBM LTO 7 6000 GB WORM tape cartridges, or IBM LTO 6 2500 GB WORM tape
cartridges. See “Ordering media supplies” on page 166.

152 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Cleaning cartridge
With each library, a specially labeled IBM Cleaning Cartridge is required to clean the drive head. The
drive itself determines when a head must be cleaned. It alerts you by lighting the Clean Drive (amber
LED) on the Operator Panel. IBM recommends the use of the Auto Clean function on this library. When
enabled, the library retrieves the cleaning cartridge that is contained in the library, inserts it in the drive
that needs cleaning, cleans the drive, then returns the cleaning cartridge to its home slot. To clean the
head manually, insert a cleaning cartridge into the tape load compartment The drive completes the
cleaning automatically. When the cleaning is finished, the drive ejects the cartridge, and the library turns
off the Clean Drive LED. See “Methods of cleaning drives” on page 69.

Note: The drive automatically ejects an expired cleaning cartridge.

The IBM Cleaning Cartridges are valid for 50 uses. The cartridge's LTO-CM chip tracks the number of
times that the cartridge is used.

Cartridge memory chip (LTO-CM)

All generations of the IBM LTO Data Cartridges include a Linear Tape-Open Cartridge Memory
(LTO-CM) chip (▌1▐ in Figure 84 on page 149). This chip contains information about the cartridge and the
tape (such as the name of the manufacturer that created the tape), and also statistical information about
the cartridge's use. The LTO-CM enhances the efficiency of the cartridge. For example, the LTO-CM stores
the end-of-data location. The next time that this cartridge is inserted and the Write command is issued,
enables the drive to quickly locate the recording area and begin recording. The LTO-CM also aids in
determining the reliability of the cartridge by storing data about its age, how many times it was loaded,
and how many errors it accumulated. When a tape cartridge is unloaded, the tape drive writes any
pertinent information to the cartridge memory.

The storage capacity of the LTO Generation 6, 7, M8, and 8 LTO-CM is 16320 bytes.

Labeling tape cartridges

The device contains a bar code reader that reads the tape labels and stores the inventory data in memory.
The device then provides the inventory information to the host application, Operator Panel, and
Management GUI. Having a bar code label on each tape cartridge enables the bar code reader to identify
the cartridge quickly, thus speeding up inventory time. Make it a practice to use bar code labels on your
tape cartridges.

A bar code label contains:

v A volume serial number (VOLSER) that is human-readable.
v A bar code that the library can read.

Note: In a library environment, it is highly recommended to use bar code labels for performance and
easily identifiable reasons. This library requires bar code labels.

Your host software might need to track the following information by using the associated bar code.
v Date of format or initialization
v Tape's media pool
v Data residing on the tape
v Age of the backup
v Errors that are encountered while the tape is used (to determine whether the tape is faulty).

Appendix B. LTO media 153

Important: Misusing and misunderstanding bar code technology can result in backup and restore
failures. Use only high-quality labels. Self-printed labels are not recommended as they are often a source
of bar code reading issues.

When read by a library's bar code reader, the bar code identifies the cartridge's VOLSER to the library.
The bar code also tells the library whether the cartridge is a data cartridge or cleaning cartridge. The bar
code includes the two-character media-type identifier: M8, Lx, where x equals 6, 7, or 8 for data cartridges
or W, X, or Y for WORM cartridges. Figure 86 on page 155 shows a sample bar code label for the LTO
Tape Cartridge.

Tape cartridges are ordered with the labels included or with custom labels. To order tape cartridges and
bar code labels, see “Ordering media supplies” on page 166. The bar code for usage in IBM tape libraries
must meet predefined specifications. They include (but are not limited to)
v Eight uppercase alphanumeric characters, where the last 2 characters must be L6, L7, M8, or L8 (LW, LX,
or LY for WORM cartridges).
v Label and printing to be non-glossy.
v Nominal narrow line or space width of 0.423 mm (0.017 in.)
v Wide to narrow ratio of 2.75:1.
v Minimum bar length of 11.1 mm (0.44 in.)
Table 50. Cartridges and VOLSERs compatible with the LTO Tape Drives
Cartridges VOLSER
LTO8 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL8
LTO8 WORM Cartridge xxxxxxLY
LTO M8 Cartridge xxxxxxM8
LTO7 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL7
LTO7 WORM Cartridge xxxxxxLX
LTO6 Data Cartridge xxxxxxL6
LTO6 WORM Cartridge xxxxxxLW
LTO Cleaning Cartridge CLNxxxLx

To determine the complete specifications of the bar code and the bar code label, go to the web at
[Link] and enter IBM LTO Cartridge Label Specification in the search box. Or, contact
your IBM sales representative.

LTO tape cartridges have a recessed area on the face of the cartridge next to the write-protect switch. Use
this area for attaching the adhesive-backed bar code label. Place the label only in the recessed label area
(see ▌5▐ in Figure 84 on page 149). A label that extends outside of the recessed area can cause loading
problems in the drive.

Attention: Do not place any type of mark on the white space at either end of the bar code. A mark in
this area might prevent the library from reading the label.

154 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figure 86. Sample bar code label on the LTO8 Tape Cartridge. The volume serial number (LTO123) and bar code are
printed on the label.

Important: The bar code label must be applied as shown, with the alphanumeric characters on top and
the bar codes on the hub side (bottom). Never apply multiple labels onto a cartridge because extra labels
can cause the cartridge to jam in a tape drive.

Guidelines for bar code labels

Apply the following guidelines whenever bar code labels are used.
v Use only IBM-approved bar code labels on cartridges to be used in an IBM tape library.
v Do not reuse a label or reapply a used label over an existing label.
v Before you apply a new label, remove the old label by slowly pulling it at a right angle to the cartridge
case.
v Use peel-clean labels that do not leave a residue after it is removed. If glue residue is on the cartridge,
remove it by gently rubbing it with your finger. Do not use a sharp object, water, or a chemical to
clean the label area.
v Examine the label before it is applied to the cartridge. Do not use the label if it has voids or smears in
the printed characters or bar code. A library 's inventory operation takes much longer if the bar code
label is not readable.
v Remove the label from the label sheet carefully. Do not stretch the label or cause the edges to curl.
v Position the label within the recessed label area (see ▌5▐ in Figure 84 on page 149).
v With light finger pressure, smooth the label so that no wrinkles or bubbles exist on its surface.
v Verify that the label is smooth and parallel, and has no roll-up or roll-over. The label must be flat to
within 0.5 mm (0.02 in.) over the length of the label and have no folds, missing pieces, or smudges.
v Do not place other machine-readable labels on other surfaces of the cartridge. They might interfere
with the ability of the drive to load the cartridge.

Write-Protect switch
All rewriteable data cartridges have a write-protect switch to prevent accidental erasure or overwriting of
data. Before a cartridge is loaded into the device, make sure the write-protect switch on the front of the
cartridge is in the wanted position.

The position of the write-protect switch on the tape cartridge (see ▌1▐) determines whether you can write
to the tape. If the switch is set to:
v Slide the switch to the right to write-protect the cartridge. An indicator, such as a red mark or small
padlock, is visible showing that the cartridge is write-protected.
v Slide the switch to the left to allow the device to write data to the cartridge.

Appendix B. LTO media 155

If possible, use your server's application Software to write-protect your cartridges (rather than manually
setting the write-protect switch). This setting allows the server's Software to identify a cartridge that no
longer contains current data and is eligible to become a scratch (blank) data cartridge. Do not
write-protect scratch (blank) cartridges; the tape drive is not able to write new data to them.

If you must manually set the write-protect switch, slide it left or right to the wanted position.

Figure 87. Setting the write-protect switch

Table 51. Location of the write-protect switch

▌1▐ Write-protect switch

Handling the cartridges

Attention: Do not insert a damaged tape cartridge into the drive. A damaged cartridge can interfere
with the reliability of a drive and might void the warranties of the drive and the cartridge. Before a tape
cartridge is inserted, inspect the cartridge case, cartridge door, and write-protect switch for breaks.

Incorrect handling or an incorrect environment can damage cartridges or their magnetic tape. To avoid
damage to your tape cartridges and to ensure the continued high reliability of your IBM LTO Ultrium
Tape Drives, use the following guidelines.

Providing training
v Post procedures that describe appropriate media handling in places where people gather.
v Ensure that anyone who handles tape is properly trained in handling and shipping procedures. This
training includes operators, users, programmers, archival services, and shipping personnel.
v Ensure that any service or contract personnel who complete archiving procedures are properly trained
in media-handling procedures.
v Include media-handling procedures as part of any services contract.
v Define and make personnel aware of data recovery procedures.

Ensuring proper packaging

v When a cartridge is shipped, use the original or better packaging.
v Always ship or store a cartridge in a jewel case.
v Use only a recommended shipping container that securely holds the cartridge in its jewel case during
transportation. Ultrium Turtlecases (by Perm-A-Store) are tested and found to be satisfactory (see

156 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
 Figure 88). They are available at [Link]

Figure 88. Tape cartridges in a Turtlecase

v Never ship a cartridge in a commercial shipping envelope. Always place it in a box or package.
v If you ship the cartridge in a cardboard box or a box of a sturdy material, ensure that you
– Place the cartridge in polyethylene plastic wrap or bags to protect it from dust, moisture, and other
contaminants.
– Pack the cartridge snugly; do not allow it to move around.
– Double-box the cartridge (place it inside a box, then place that box inside the shipping box) and add
padding between the two boxes (see Figure 89).

Figure 89. Double-boxing tape cartridges for shipping

Proper acclimation and environmental conditions

To ensure the longest possible life for your data cartridges, follow these guidelines.

Appendix B. LTO media 157

v Before you use a tape cartridge, acclimate it to the operating environment for 24 hours or the time
necessary to prevent condensation in the drive. The time varies, depending on the environmental
extremes to which the cartridge was exposed. If the data cartridge was exposed to temperatures
outside the specified ranges, stabilize the cartridge at room temperature for the same length of time it
was exposed to extreme temperatures or 24 hours, whichever is less.
v Ensure that all surfaces of a cartridge are dry before it is inserted.
v Do not expose data cartridges to direct sunlight or sources of heat, including portable heaters and
heating ducts.
v Do not place data cartridges near sources of electromagnetic energy or strong magnetic fields such as
computer monitors, electric motors, speakers, or X-ray equipment. Exposure to electromagnetic energy
or magnetic fields can destroy data and the embedded servo code that is written on the media by the
cartridge manufacturer, which can render the cartridge unusable.
v Use only the data cartridges that are designated for your device.
v Clean the tape drive when the Clean drive LED is illuminated.
v Do not drop a cartridge. Excessive shock can damage the internal contents of the cartridge or the
cartridge case itself, making the cartridge unusable.
v Place identification labels only in the designated area on the cartridge.
v Maintain the conditions that are described in “Environmental and shipping specifications for tape
cartridges” on page 165.

Attention: Do not degauss LTO data cartridges! These data cartridges are pre-recorded with a magnetic
servo signal. This signal is required to use the cartridge with the LTO tape drive. Keep magnetically
charged objects away from the cartridge.

Completing a thorough inspection

After a cartridge is purchased and before it is used, complete the following steps.
v Inspect the cartridge's packaging to determine potential rough handling.
v When a cartridge is inspected, open only the cartridge door. Do not open any other part of the
cartridge case. The upper and lower parts of the case are held together with screws; separating them
impairs the usefulness of the cartridge.
v Inspect the cartridge for damage before it is used or stored.
v Inspect the rear of the cartridge (the part that loads first into the tape load compartment) and ensure
that no gaps appear in the seam of the cartridge case. See ▌1▐ in Figure 90 on page 159 and ▌4▐ in
Figure 92 on page 161. If gaps appear in the seam (see Figure 90 on page 159), the leader pin might be
dislodged. Go to “Repositioning or reattaching a leader pin” on page 160.

158 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figure 90. Checking for gaps in the seams of a cartridge

v Check that the leader pin is properly seated. See ▌2▐ in Figure 91 on page 160.
v If you suspect that the cartridge was mishandled but it appears usable, copy any data onto a good
cartridge immediately for possible data recovery. Discard the mishandled cartridge.
v Review handling and shipping procedures.

Handling the cartridge carefully

v Do not drop the cartridge. If the cartridge drops, slide the cartridge door back and ensure that the
leader pin is properly seated in the pin-retaining spring clips. See ▌2▐ in Figure 91 on page 160. If the
leader pin becomes dislodged, go to “Repositioning or reattaching a leader pin” on page 160.
v Do not handle tape that is outside the cartridge. Handling the tape can damage the tape's surface or
edges, which might interfere with read or write reliability. Pulling on tape that is outside the cartridge
can damage the tape and the brake mechanism in the cartridge.
v Do not stack more than six cartridges.
v Do not degauss a cartridge that you intend to reuse. Degaussing makes the tape unusable.

Examples of cartridge problems

Split cartridge case. See Figure 90.

The cartridge's case is damaged. There is a high possibility of media damage and potential loss.
1. Look for cartridge mishandling.
2. Use the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit (part number 08L9129) to correctly seat the pin (see
“Repositioning or reattaching a leader pin” on page 160). Then, immediately use data recovery
procedures to minimize chances of data loss.
3. Review media-handling procedures.

Improper placement of leader pin. See Figure 91 on page 160.

The leader pin is misaligned.

1. Look for cartridge damage.

Appendix B. LTO media 159

2. Use the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit (part number 08L9129) to correctly seat the pin (see
“Repositioning or reattaching a leader pin”). Then, immediately use data recovery procedures to
minimize chances of data loss.

Repositioning or reattaching a leader pin

Attention: Use a repaired tape cartridge only to recover data and move it to another cartridge.
Continued use of a repaired cartridge might void the warranties of the drive and the cartridge.

If the leader pin in your cartridge becomes dislodged from its pin-retaining spring clips or detaches from
the tape, you must use the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit (part number 08L9129) to reposition or
reattach it. (Do not reattach the pin if you must remove more than 7 meters (23 feet) of leader tape.) The
sections that follow describe each procedure.

Repositioning a leader pin

A leader pin that is improperly seated inside a cartridge interferes with the operation of the drive.
Figure 91 shows a leader pin in the incorrect ▌1▐ and correct ▌2▐ positions.

To place the leader pin in its proper position, you need the following tools:
v Plastic or blunt-end tweezers
v Cartridge manual rewind tool (from Leader Pin Reattachment Kit, part number 08L9129)

Figure 91. Leader pin in the incorrect and correct positions. The cartridge door is open and the leader pin is visible
inside the cartridge.

To reposition the leader pin:

1. Slide open the cartridge door (▌1▐ in Figure 92 on page 161) and locate the leader pin ▌2▐ (you might
need to shake the cartridge gently to roll the pin toward the door).
2. With plastic or blunt-end tweezers, grasp the leader pin and position it in the pin-retaining spring
clips ▌3▐.
3. Press the leader pin gently into the clips until it snaps into place and is firmly seated.

160 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
4. Close the cartridge door.

Figure 92. Placing the dislodged leader pin into the correct position. The cartridge door is open to show the leader pin.

5. To rewind the tape, insert the cartridge manual rewind tool (▌1▐ in Figure 93) into the cartridge's hub
▌2▐ and turn it clockwise until the tape becomes taut.

Figure 93. Rewinding the tape into the cartridge

6. Remove the rewind tool by pulling it away from the cartridge.

7. If you suspect that the cartridge was mishandled but it appears usable, copy any data onto a good
cartridge immediately for possible data recovery. Discard the mishandled cartridge.

Reattaching a leader pin

The first meter of tape in a cartridge is leader tape. Once the leader tape is removed, tape breakage might
occur. After the leader pin is reattached, transfer data from the defective tape cartridge. Do not reuse the
defective tape cartridge.

The Leader Pin Reattachment Kit contains three parts.

v Leader pin attach tool (see ▌1▐ in Figure 94 on page 162). A plastic brace that holds the cartridge door
open.

Appendix B. LTO media 161

v Cartridge manual rewind tool (see ▌2▐ in Figure 94). A device that fits into the cartridge's hub and
winds the tape into and out of the cartridge.
v Pin supplies (see ▌3▐ in Figure 94). Leader pins and C-clips.

Attention:
v Use only the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit to reattach the leader pin to the tape. Other methods of
reattaching the pin damages the tape, the drive, or both.
v Use this procedure on your tape cartridge only when the leader pin detaches from the magnetic tape
and you must copy the cartridge's data onto another cartridge. Destroy the damaged cartridge after
you copy the data. This procedure might affect the performance of the leader pin during threading and
unloading operations.
v Touch only the end of the tape. Touching the tape in an area other than the end can damage the tape's
surface or edges, which might interfere with read or write reliability.

Figure 94. Leader Pin Reattachment Kit

The following procedure describes how to reattach a leader pin.

To reattach a leader pin by using the IBM Leader Pin Reattachment Kit:
1. Attach the leader pin attach tool (▌1▐ in Figure 95 on page 163) to the cartridge ▌2▐ so that the tool's
hook ▌3▐ latches into the cartridge's door ▌4▐. Pull the tool back to hold the door open, then slide
the tool onto the cartridge. Open the tool's pivot arm ▌5▐.

162 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figure 95. Attaching the leader pin attach tool to the cartridge. To hold the cartridge door open, hook the tool into the
door and pull the tool back.

2. To find the end of the tape inside the cartridge, attach the cartridge manual rewind tool (▌1▐ in
Figure 96) to the cartridge's hub ▌2▐ by fitting the tool's teeth between the teeth of the hub. Turn the
tool clockwise until you see the end of the tape inside the cartridge. Then, slowly turn the rewind
tool counterclockwise to bring the tape edge toward the cartridge door ▌3▐.
3. Continue to turn the rewind tool counterclockwise until approximately 13 cm (5 in.) of tape hangs
from the cartridge door. If necessary, grasp the tape and pull gently to unwind it from the cartridge.
4. Remove the rewind tool by pulling it away from the cartridge. Set the tool and the cartridge aside.

Figure 96. Winding the tape out of the cartridge. Turn the cartridge manual rewind tool clockwise to see the end of the
tape, then turn it counterclockwise to bring the tape to the cartridge door.

Appendix B. LTO media 163

 5. On the leader pin (▌1▐ in Figure 97), locate the open side of the C-clip ▌2▐. The C-clip is a small
black part that secures the tape ▌3▐ to the pin.
6. Remove the C-clip from the leader pin by using your fingers to push the clip away from the pin. Set
the pin aside and discard the clip.

Figure 97. Removing the C-clip from the leader pin. Use your fingers to push the C-clip from the leader pin.

7. Position the tape in the alignment groove of the leader pin attach tool (see ▌1▐ in Figure 98 on page
165).
8. Place a new C-clip into the retention groove ▌2▐ (Figure 98 on page 165) on the leader pin
attachment tool and make sure that the clip's open side faces up.
9. Place the leader pin (from step 6) into the cavity ▌3▐ (Figure 98 on page 165) of the leader pin attach
tool.
Attention: To prevent the leader pin from rolling into the cartridge, in the following step use care
when the tape is folded over the pin.
10. Fold the tape over the leader pin and hold it with your fingers (see Figure 98 on page 165).

Note: Use care to ensure that the tape is centered over the leader pin. Failure to properly center the
tape on the pin causes the repaired cartridge to fail. When the tape is properly centered, a 0.25 mm
(0.01-in.) gap exists on both sides of the pin.

164 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figure 98. Attaching the leader pin to the tape

11. Close the pivot arm ▌4▐ of the leader pin attach tool by swinging it over the leader pin so that the
C-clip snaps onto the pin and the tape.
12. Swing the pivot arm open and trim the excess tape ▌5▐ so that it is flush with the reattached leader
pin ▌6▐.
13. Use your fingers to remove the leader pin from the cavity ▌3▐ in the leader pin attach tool.
14. Use the cartridge manual rewind tool to wind the tape back into the cartridge (wind the tape
clockwise). Ensure that the leader pin is latched by the pin-retaining spring clips on each end of the
leader pin.
15. Remove the rewind tool.
16. Remove the leader pin attach tool by lifting its end up and away from the cartridge.

Environmental and shipping specifications for tape cartridges

Before you use a tape cartridge, acclimate it to the operating environment for 24 hours or the time
necessary to prevent condensation in the drive. The time varies, depending on the environmental
extremes to which the cartridge was exposed. If the data cartridge was exposed to temperatures outside
the specified ranges, stabilize the cartridge at room temperature for the same length of time it was
exposed to extreme temperatures or 24 hours, whichever is less.

The best storage container for the cartridges (until they are opened) is the original shipping container.
The plastic wrapping prevents dirt from accumulating on the cartridges and partially protects them from
humidity changes.

Appendix B. LTO media 165

When you ship a cartridge, place it in its jewel case or in a sealed, moisture-proof bag to protect it from
moisture, contaminants, and physical damage. Ship the cartridge in a shipping container that has enough
packing material to cushion the cartridge and prevent it from moving within the container.

Table 52 gives the environment for operating, storing, and shipping LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridges.
Table 52. Environment for operating, storing, and shipping the LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge
Environmental Specifications
Environmental Factor Operating Operational Storage1 Archival Storage2 Shipping
-23 to 49°C (-9 to
Temperature 10 - 35°C 40 - 60°C 16 - 25°C (61 - 77°F)
120°F)
Relative humidity
20 - 80% 20 - 80% 20 - 50% 5 - 80%
(non-condensing)
Maximum wet bulb
26°C (79°F) 26°C (79°F) 26°C (79°F) 26°C (79°F)
temperature
Notes:
1. The short term or operational storage environment is for storage durations of up to six months.
2. The long term or archival storage environment is for durations of six months up to 10 years.

Disposing of tape cartridges

Under the current rules of the US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), regulation 40CFR261, the LTO
Ultrium Tape Cartridge is classified as non-hazardous waste. As such, it might be disposed of in the same
way as normal office trash. These regulations are amended from time to time, and you must review them
at the time of disposal.

If your local, state, country (non-US), or regional regulations are more restrictive than EPA 40CFR261, you
must review them before you dispose of a cartridge. Contact your account representative for information
about the materials that are in the cartridge.

If a tape cartridge must be disposed of in a secure manner, you can erase the data on the cartridge with a
high-energy ac degausser. Use a minimum of 4000 oersted peak field over the entire space that the
cartridge occupies. The tape must make two passes through the field at 90-degree orientation change for
each pass to achieve complete erasure. Some commercial degaussers have two magnetic field regions
offset 90 degrees from each other to accomplish complete erasure in one pass for higher throughput.
Degaussing makes the cartridge unusable.

If you burn the cartridge and tape, ensure that the incineration complies with all applicable regulations.

Ordering media supplies

Table 53 lists the cartridges and media supplies that you can order for the drive.
Table 53. Media supplies
Feature codes for Radio
Supply Item Methods of Ordering Frequency Identification
(RFID) labels
12 TB Ultrium 8 Data Cartridge 20Pk Specify Machine Type 3589 Model 552 and the Available from media
VOLSER characters that you want. resellers.
Bar code labels are preapplied to
cartridges.

166 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Table 53. Media supplies (continued)
Feature codes for Radio
Supply Item Methods of Ordering Frequency Identification
(RFID) labels
12 TB Ultrium 8 Data Cartridge 20Pk Specify Machine Type 3589 Model 652. N/A

Order VOLSER labels separately.

12 TB Ultrium 8 Data Cartridge 5Pk Specify Part Number 01PL340 through an N/A
(black and white labels unattached) IBM-authorized distributor.
12 TB Ultrium 8 WORM Data Available from media resellers. Available from media
Cartridges resellers.
9 TB Ultrium 7 Uninitialized Data Specify Machine Type 3589 Model 452 and the N/A
Cartridge 20Pk M8 Labeled VOLSER characters that you want.
6 TB Ultrium 7 Data Cartridge 20Pk Specify Machine Type 3589 Model 551 and the FC 5511
VOLSER characters that you want.
Bar code labels are preapplied to
cartridges. You can also order through an IBM-authorized
distributor.
6 TB Ultrium 7 Data Cartridge 20Pk Specify Machine Type 3589 Model 651. N/A

Order VOLSER labels separately. You can also order through an IBM-authorized
distributor.
6 TB Ultrium 7 Data Cartridge 5Pk Specify Part Number 38L7189 through an N/A
IBM-authorized distributor.
No labels.
6 TB Ultrium 7 WORM Tape Cartridge Specify Machine Type 3589 Model 571 and the FC 5711
20Pk VOLSER characters that you want.

Bar code labels are preapplied to If you would like RFID labels, also specify the
cartridges. feature code provided.
6 TB Ultrium 7 WORM Tape Cartridge Specify Machine Type 3589 Model 671. N/A
20Pk

Order VOLSER labels separately.

2.5 TB Ultrium 6 Data Cartridge 20Pk Specify Machine Type 3589 Model 550 and the FC 5510
VOLSER characters that you want.
Bar code labels are preapplied to
cartridges. If you would like RFID labels, also specify the
feature code provided.
2.5 TB Ultrium 6 Data Cartridge 20Pk Specify Machine Type 3589 Model 650. N/A

Order VOLSER labels separately.

2.5 TB Ultrium 6 Data Cartridge 5Pk Specify Part Number 35P1902 through an N/A
(black and white labels unattached) IBM-authorized distributor.
2.5 TB Ultrium 6 WORM Tape Specify Machine Type 3589 Model 570 and the FC 5710
Cartridge 20Pk VOLSER characters that you want..

Bar code labels are preapplied to If you would like RFID labels, also specify the
cartridges. feature code provided.
2.5 TB Ultrium 6 WORM Tape Specify Machine Type 3589 Model 670. N/A
Cartridge 20Pk

Order VOLSER labels separately.

Leader Pin Reattachment Kit Order Part Number 08L9129 through an N/A
IBM-authorized distributor.

Appendix B. LTO media 167

Table 53. Media supplies (continued)
Feature codes for Radio
Supply Item Methods of Ordering Frequency Identification
(RFID) labels
Manual Rewind Tool Order Part Number 08L9130 through an N/A
IBM-authorized distributor.

To find the closest IBM-authorized distributor, visit the web at [Link] or

call 1-888-IBM-MEDIA.

Ordering bar code labels

LTO drives do not require cartridges to have bar code labels. However, in a library environment it is
highly recommended to utilize bar code labels for performance and easily identifiable reasons. You can
order these labels separately from the IBM data cartridges and cleaning cartridges.

You can order bar code labels directly from the authorized label suppliers in Table 54.
Table 54. Authorized suppliers of custom bar code labels
In America In Europe and Asia
EDP/Colorflex EDP Europe, Ltd.
Broomfield, CO U. K.
U. S. A. Telephone: 44 (0) 1245-322380
Telephone: 800-438-8362 [Link]
[Link]
Dataware Dataware Labels Europe
Houston, TX 77274 Australia
U. S. A. Telephone: (029) 496-1111
Telephone: 800-426-4844 [Link]
[Link]
Netc Netc Europe Ltd
Trumbell, CT U. K.
U. S. A. Telephone: 44 (0) 1823 49 1439
Telephone: 203-372-6382
Netc Asia Pacific Pty Ltd
[Link]
Australia
Telephone: 61 (0) 7 5442 6263
[Link]

168 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Appendix C. Replacement parts
This library has Tier 1 and Tier 2 CRUs (customer replaceable units). (Tier 1: No tools needed Tier 2:
Tools needed) These CRUs are parts of the library that must be added, removed, and replaced by the
customer.

To order parts, contact IBM Service. See “Contacting IBM technical support” on page 78.
Table 55. Replacement parts
Part Number Description
00VJ943 3555 Base Chassis - Includes operator panel, accessor, spooling mechanism, 1
power supply
00VJ944 3555 Expansion Chassis
00VJ955 3555 Accessor - Includes Spooling Mechanism
00VJ956 3555 Spooling Mechanism
00VJ961 3555 Base Controller
00GH850
00VJ962 3555 Expansion Controller
00GH772 3555 Expansion Cable
00GH763 3555 LTO6 FH FC Drive Assembly
00GH761 3555 LTO6 HH FC Drive Assembly
00GH759 3555 LTO6 HH SAS Drive Assembly
00GH768 3555 LTO7 FH FC Drive Assembly
00GH766 3555 LTO7 HH FC Drive Assembly
00GH764 3555 LTO7 HH SAS Drive Assembly
00GH814 3555 LTO8 FH FC Drive Assembly
00GH812 3555 LTO8 HH FC Drive Assembly
00GH810 3555 LTO8 HH SAS Drive Assembly
00GH724 3555 Left Magazine Asm
00GH726 3555 Right Magazine Asm
00VJ940 3555 Power supply
12R9314 Fibre Channel Wrap Tool
95P6566 SAS Wrap Tool
00VJ139 2 M Mini-SAS/Mini-SAS 1x Cable
15R8848 Fiber Cable HBW LC/LC 25 M
41V2120 Fiber Cable HBW LC/LC 10 M
46C2900 4 M AE1 MINI-SAS TO MINI-SAS
46C2902 3 M Y MINI-SAS HD TO MINI-SAS
46X9904 SAS 1X to 4X INTERPOSER
39M5068 Power Cable 10 AMP / 250 VAC - 2.8M
39M5081 Power Cable 10 AMP / 125 VAC - 2.8M
39M5095 Power Cable 10 AMP / 250 VAC - 2.8M

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 169

Table 55. Replacement parts (continued)
Part Number Description
39M5102 Power Cable 10 AMP / 250 VAC - 2.8M
39M5123 Power Cable 10 AMP / 250 VAC - 2.8M
39M5130 Power Cable 10 AMP / 250 VAC - 2.8M
39M5144 Power Cable 10 AMP / 250 VAC - 2.8M
39M5151 Power Cable 10 AMP / 250 VAC - 2.8M
39M5158 Power Cable 10 AMP / 250 VAC - 2.8M
39M5165 Power Cable 10 AMP / 250 VAC - 2.8M
39M5172 Power Cable 10 AMP / 250 VAC - 2.8M
39M5199 Power Cable 10 AMP / 250 VAC - 2.8M
39M5206 Power Cable 10 AMP / 250 VAC - 2.8M
39M5219 Power Cable 10 AMP / 250 VAC - 2.8M
39M5226 Power Cable 10 AMP / 250 VAC - 2.8M
39M5240 Power Cable 10 AMP / 250 VAC - 2.8M
39M5247 Power Cable 10 AMP / 250 VAC - 2.8M
39M5254 Power Cable 10 AMP / 250 VAC - 2.8M
39M5378 Power Cable 10 AMP / 250 VAC - 4.3M

170 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Appendix D. Manual cartridge removal procedure
Follow this procedure if a cartridge must be manually removed and repaired.

Attention:
v It is recommended that the drive and tape be returned to IBM for removal and recovery.
v If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape that contains ACTIVE or 'ONLY COPY' data (no backup),
eject commands that are issued at the host fail to unload the tape, and power-cycling the drive fails to
eject the cartridge, make no further attempts to unload this tape. Call Technical Support and open a
PMR if one is not already open, to initiate the process of sending the drive with the loaded cartridge in
for recovery.
v These procedures must be completed only by a trained IBM service provider. SSRs claim their time
against service code 33 ECA 013 when they complete this procedure.
v Inform the customer that the following procedure has high risk of damaging the drive and high risk of
not being able to recover the data.
v A drive brick transfer to another drive sled is NOT POSSIBLE with this library.

Recommended tools
v #1 Phillips screwdriver
v ESD Kit
v Flashlight (optional)
v #1 Flathead screwdriver (optional)

Before you begin

When a tape drive error is reported by the library, the drive produces a memory dump and saves it in
Random Access Memory (RAM). If the library or drive is powered OFF, this information is lost. To
preserve this information for analysis by IBM Technical Support, the drive memory dump must be copied
to the drive's flash memory. Complete the following steps to write a drive memory dump to flash
memory.
1. Log in to the Management GUI.
a. User name: Service
b. Password: [contact IBM Technical Support for the Service password]
2. Attempt to remove the cartridge with the device power ON and with library manager, a host
application, or the Unload button. Press and hold Unload for 12 seconds. This action causes the drive
to eject the cartridge when it completes the midtape recovery
3. Ensure that the operator issued the appropriate application commands to complete a rewind and
unload of the cartridge. This procedure is to ensure that the stuck cartridge is not because of a hang
condition in the application
4. Attempt to remove the cartridge by power-cycling the drive. Look for the drive to attempt a midtape
recovery.

Note: It can take 5 minutes to 1 hour (depending on cartridge type (LTO 5, and so on) and how
much of the tape is spooled out of the cartridge) for the cartridge to rewind and unload.
5. If the cartridge unloads, inform the operator that the cartridge is unloaded. If the cartridge does not
unload, repeat steps 2 and 3 before this procedure is continued.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 171

 Note: If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape that contains ACTIVE or 'ONLY COPY' data
(there is no backup), eject commands that are issued at the host fail to unload the tape, and
power-cycling the drive fails to eject the cartridge, make no further attempts to unload this tape. Call
Technical Support and open a PMR if one is not already open, to initiate the process of sending the
drive with the loaded cartridge in for recovery.

Beginning procedure
Note: If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape that contains ACTIVE or 'ONLY COPY' data (there is
no backup), eject commands that are issued at the host fail to unload the tape, and power-cycling the
drive fails to eject the cartridge, make no further attempts to unload this tape. Call Technical Support
and open a PMR if one is not already open, to initiate the process of sending the drive with the loaded
cartridge in for recovery.

Removing the drive brick from the sled

1. Remove the tape drive sled from the library.
2. Place the sled on a clean, sturdy work surface. It is not necessary to remove the plastic cover or
connection card.

Figure 99. Connection screws and plastic cover

▌1▐ Connection card screws

▌2▐ Plastic cover
▌3▐ Connection card (under the plastic cover)
▌4▐ Screws that hold the drive brick to the sled (2 on each side).

3. Remove the drive brick from the sled by completing these steps:
a. Remove the four screws (two on each side of the sled ▌4▐) that secure the sled to the drive brick.

172 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
 b. Pull the drive brick out of the front of the sled far enough to unplug the cables (▌5▐). Some of the
cables and connectors are small and can be delicate, so be careful when you are unplugging them.

Figure 100. The drive brick, showing the cables to be unplugged.

Note: Make sure to note where each cable is connected, so they can be connected correctly later.
c. Remove the drive brick from the sled.

Removing the drive cover

1. Ground yourself to the drive by using an ESD Kit.
2. Remove the cover of the full height drive by completing these steps:
a. Remove the four cover-mounting screws and washers ▌1▐.
b. Remove the cover by lifting it up.

Appendix D. Manual cartridge removal procedure 173

Figure 101. Removing the cover from the full height drive

3. Remove the cover of the half height drive by completing these steps:
a. Remove the four cover-mounting screws (▌1▐). Two screws are on each side of the drive.
b. Remove the cover by lifting it up.

174 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figure 102. Removing the cover from the half height drive

4. Inspect the drive to decide which of the following conditions most closely matches the symptom on
the drive:
v Tape spooled off the supply reel - All the tape appears to be on the take up reel and no tape is on
the supply reel (inside the cartridge). Test the drive after the procedure is completed.
v Tape pulled from leader pin (or broken at the front end) - All the tape appears to be on the
supply reel (inside the cartridge) and little or no tape appears to be on the take up reel. The leader
block is positioned in the take up reel. Return the drive after the procedure is completed.
v Tape broken in mid-tape - Tape appears to be on both the supply reel (inside the cartridge) and
take up reel. Test the drive after the procedure is completed.
v Tape tangled along tape path - Tape appears to be tangled and damaged but intact. Return the
drive after the procedure is completed.
-- OR --
v No damage to tape (or no apparent failure) - There appears to be no damage or slack to the tape.
Return the drive after the procedure is completed.

Full height drive: Tape spooled off supply reel

Note: If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape that contains ACTIVE or 'ONLY COPY' data (there is
no backup), eject commands that are issued at the host fail to unload the tape, and power-cycling the
drive fails to eject the cartridge, make no further attempts to unload this tape. Call Technical Support
and open a PMR if one is not already open, to initiate the process of sending the drive with the loaded
cartridge in for recovery.
1. With the front of the drive facing you, pull an arm's length of tape out of the take up reel from the
left side of the drive.
2. From the take up reel, thread tape around the rear of the tape path and over the head and rollers on
the left side of the drive.
Appendix D. Manual cartridge removal procedure 175
3. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.
4. Moisten a cotton swab with water and wet approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) of the tape end and feed it
onto the supply reel (inside the cartridge).
5. From the bottom of the drive, insert a 2.5 mm offset hex wrench through the bottom cover access hole
and into the reel motor axle.

Figure 103. The hex wrench rewinds tape into cartridge

6. Turn the supply reel clockwise, allowing the moistened tape to adhere to the hub as it winds around
the supply reel (inside the cartridge).
7. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within the flanges of the tape
guiding rollers. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
8. Go to “Ending procedure” on page 193.

Half height drive: Tape spooled off supply reel

Attention: DO NOT TOUCH THE OUTER GUIDE RAIL (▌2▐). THIS RAIL IS DELICATE AND
EASILY DAMAGED.

Note: If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape that contains ACTIVE or 'ONLY COPY' data (there is
no backup), eject commands that are issued at the host fail to unload the tape, and power-cycling the
drive fails to eject the cartridge, make no further attempts to unload this tape. Call Technical Support
and open a PMR if one is not already open, to initiate the process of sending the drive with the loaded
cartridge in for recovery.
1. From the takeup reel, pull an arm's length of tape around the rear of the tape path and over the head
and rollers on the left side of the drive.
2. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.
3. Ensure that the tape is not twisted. Untwist the tape if required.

176 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
4. Moisten a cotton swab with water and wet approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) of the tape end and feed it
onto the supply reel (inside the cartridge).
5. Turn the supply reel (▌4▐) clockwise, allowing the moistened tape to adhere to the hub as it winds
around the supply reel (inside the cartridge).

Figure 104. Rewinding tape into cartridge

▌1▐ Loader motor worm gear ▌3▐ Takeup reel motor

▌2▐ Outer guide rail (WARNING: Do ▌4▐ Supply reel motor
Not Touch)

6. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within the flanges of the tape
guiding rollers. Turn the supply reel (▌4▐) 10 more turns. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
7. Go to “Ending procedure” on page 193.

Full height drive: Tape pulled from or broken near leader pin

Appendix D. Manual cartridge removal procedure 177

Figure 105. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train.

▌1▐ Loader motor worm gear ▌6▐ Threader mechanism gear

▌2▐ Cartridge loader tray guide bearing ▌7▐ Lever
▌3▐ Rotator stub ▌8▐ Loader mechanism gear
▌4▐ Threader motor worm gear
▌5▐ Threader intermediate gear

1. From the left side of the drive, pull out tape from the take up reel.

Note: If there is more than approximately 0.6 m (2 ft.) of tape on the take up reel, go to “Full height
drive: Tape broken in mid-tape” on page 181.
2. If there is less than approximately 0.6 m (2 ft.) of tape on the take up reel, cut off the excess tape as
close to the leader pin, as possible.
3. Locate the threader motor worm gear (▌4▐) the rear of the drive. Use your finger to rotate the
threader motor worm gear and slowly rotate the threader mechanism gear (▌6▐) clockwise. This
action rotates the threader motor worm gear (▌4▐) clockwise, drawing the tape leader block assembly
(LBA) into the cartridge.
4. As the LBA is secured in the cartridge, you hear the LBA retention spring clips click into place. If
you do not hear the click, continue rolling until the threader motor worm gear (▌4▐) stops. The LBA
is in the correct position.

Note: Be sure to keep tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the cartridge by using a hex
wrench as shown in Figure 103 on page 176.
5. Notice the following mechanisms:
a. Loader mechanism gear (▌8▐) nearest the front of the drive that actuates the cartridge loader
mechanism
b. Position of the rotator stub (▌3▐).
178 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
 c. Front loader motor worm gear (▌1▐). Rotating this gear allows the loader mechanism gear (▌8▐)
to turn.
6. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (▌1▐) to turn the loader mechanism gear (▌6▐) counterclockwise.
Continue turning until the rotator stub (▌3▐) loses contact with the lever (▌7▐). This action releases
the LBA leader pin.
7. Rotate the threader motor worm gear (▌4▐) to turn the threader mechanism gear (▌6▐)
counterclockwise. This action moves the LBA out of the cartridge and past the read/write head. Stop
this rotation when the LBA is near the tape guide roller nearest the rear of the drive (▌1▐).

Figure 106. Leader Block Assembly (LBA)

8. Continue rotating the loader motor worm gear (▌1▐) until the rotate stub (▌3▐) is positioned as
shown. Notice that the rotator stub (▌3▐) is nearly aligned with the cartridge loader tray guide
bearing (▌2▐).
9. Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray.
10. Go to “Ending procedure” on page 193.

Half height drive: Tape pulled from or broken near leader pin

Appendix D. Manual cartridge removal procedure 179

Figure 107. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train.

▌1▐ Threader intermediate gear ▌2▐ Threader mechanism gear ▌3▐ Loader motor worm gear

1. Pull out tape from the takeup reel.

Note: If there is more than approximately 0.6 m (2 ft.) of tape on the takeup reel, go to “Half height
drive: Tape broken in mid-tape” on page 182
2. If there is less than approximately 0.6 m (2 ft.) of tape on the takeup reel, cut off the excess tape as
close to the leader pin, as possible.
3. Reattach the leader pin to the remaining tape.
4. Locate the threader intermediate gear (▌1▐) near the rear of the drive. You can use your finger to
rotate the threader intermediate gear (▌1▐) and slowly rotate the threader mechanism gear (▌2▐)
clockwise. This action draws the tape leader block assembly (LBA) into the cartridge.
5. As the leader pin is secured in the cartridge, you hear the leader pin retention spring clips click into
place. If you do not hear the click, continue rolling until the threader intermediate gear (▌1▐) stops.
The LBA is in the correct position.
6. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (▌3▐) clockwise as viewed from the front of the drive until it
stops. This action releases the LBA leader pin.
7. Rotate the threader intermediate gear (▌1▐) counterclockwise until the leader block is in front of the
read/write head. This action moves the LBA out of the cartridge.

180 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figure 108. Leader Block Assembly (LBA)

▌1▐ Loader motor worm gear ▌2▐ Leader block assembly (LBA)

8. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (▌3▐) counterclockwise as viewed from the front of the drive
until it stops.
9. Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray.
10. Go to “Ending procedure” on page 193.

Full height drive: Tape broken in mid-tape

1. With the front of the drive facing you, pull an arm's length of tape out of the take up reel from the
left side of the drive.

Note: If there is less than approximately 5 cm (2 in.) of tape on the take up reel, go to “Full height
drive: Tape pulled from or broken near leader pin” on page 177.
2. From the supply reel inside the cartridge, pull approximately 0.3 m (1 ft.) of tape.
3. From the take up reel, thread tape around the rear of the tape path and over the head rollers on the
left side of the drive.
4. Moisten a cotton swab with water, and wet approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) of the tape end. Overlap
the tape ends, loosely mending them together.
5. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.
6. From the bottom of the drive, locate the access hole (▌1▐ in Figure 109 on page 182) in the bottom
cover. Insert a 2.5 mm offset hex wrench through the bottom cover access hole and into the reel motor
axle. Begin spooling tape back into the cartridge by turning the hex wrench clockwise.

Appendix D. Manual cartridge removal procedure 181

Figure 109. The hex wrench rewinds tape into cartridge

7. Turn the supply reel clockwise, carefully guiding the mended portion of the tape to wind around the
hub of the supply reel that is located inside the cartridge. Continue spooling into the cartridge until
the tape is taut. The tape must remain within the flanges of the tape guiding rollers. Ensure that you
do not stretch the tape.
8. Go to “Ending procedure” on page 193.

Half height drive: Tape broken in mid-tape

1. With the front of the drive facing you, pull an arm's length of tape out of the takeup reel. From the
takeup reel, thread tape around the rear of the tape path and over the head rollers on the left side of
the drive.

Note: If there is less than approximately 5 cm (2 in.) of tape on the takeup reel, go to “Half height
drive: Tape pulled from or broken near leader pin” on page 179.
2. From the supply reel inside the cartridge, pull approximately 0.3 m (1 ft.) of tape.
3. Ensure that the tape is not twisted. Untwist the tape if required
4. Moisten a cotton swab with water, and wet approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) of the tape end. Overlap
the tape ends, loosely mending them together.
5. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up
6. Turn the supply reel (▌4▐) clockwise, carefully guiding the mended portion of the tape to wind
around the hub of the supply reel that is located inside the cartridge. Continue spooling into the
cartridge until the tape is taut. The tape must remain within the flanges of the tape guiding rollers.
Turn the supply reel (▌4▐) 10 more turns. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.

182 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figure 110. Rewinding tape into cartridge

▌1▐ Loader motor worm gear ▌3▐ Takeup reel motor

▌2▐ Outer guide rail (WARNING: Do ▌4▐ Supply reel motor
Not Touch)

7. Go to “Ending procedure” on page 193.

Full height drive: Tape tangled along tape path

Note: If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape that contains ACTIVE or 'ONLY COPY' data (there is
no backup), eject commands that are issued at the host fail to unload the tape, and power-cycling the
drive fails to eject the cartridge, make no further attempts to unload this tape. Call Technical Support
and open a PMR if one is not already open, to initiate the process of sending the drive with the loaded
cartridge in for recovery.
1. Carefully pull out excess tape and untangle.

Note: If you find the tape to be broken, go to one of the following appropriate procedures:
v “Full height drive: Tape spooled off supply reel” on page 175
v “Full height drive: Tape pulled from or broken near leader pin” on page 177
--OR--
“Full height drive: Tape broken in mid-tape” on page 181
2. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.

Appendix D. Manual cartridge removal procedure 183

Figure 111. The hex wrench rewinds tape into cartridge

3. From the bottom of the drive, locate the access hole (▌1▐ in Figure 111).
4. Insert a 2.5 mm offset hex wrench through the bottom cover access hole and into the reel motor axle.
Begin spooling the tape back into the cartridge by turning the hex wrench clockwise.
5. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within the flanges of the tape
guiding rollers. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
6. Locate the threader motor worm gear (▌4▐ in Figure 112 on page 185) on the rear of the drive. Use
your finger to rotate the treader motor worm gear and slowly rotate the threader mechanism gear
(▌6▐ in Figure 112 on page 185) clockwise. This action rotates the threader motor worm gear (▌4▐ in
Figure 112 on page 185) clockwise, drawing the LBA into the cartridge.

184 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figure 112. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train.

▌1▐ Loader motor worm gear ▌6▐ Threader mechanism gear

▌2▐ Cartridge loader tray guide bearing ▌7▐ Lever
▌3▐ Rotator stub ▌8▐ Loader mechanism gear
▌4▐ Threader motor worm gear
▌5▐ Threader intermediate gear

7. As the tape leader block assembly (LBA) is secured in the cartridge, you hear the LBA retention
spring clips click into place. If you do not hear the click, continue rolling until the threader motor
worm gear (▌4▐ in Figure 112) stops. The LBA is in the correct position.

Note: Be sure to keep tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the cartridge by using a hex
wrench as shown in Figure 111 on page 184.
8. Notice these mechanisms:
a. Loader mechanism gear (▌6▐ in Figure 112) nearest the front of the drive that actuates the
cartridge loader mechanism.
b. Position of the rotate stub (▌3▐ in Figure 112).
c. Front loader motor worm gear (▌1▐ in Figure 112). Rotating this gear allows the loader
mechanism gear (▌8▐ in Figure 112) to turn.
9. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (▌1▐ in Figure 112) to turn the threader mechanism gear (▌6▐ in
Figure 112) counterclockwise. Continue turning until the rotator stub (▌3▐ in Figure 112) loses contact
with the lever (▌7▐ in Figure 112). This action releases the LBA leader pin.
10. Rotate the threader motor worm gear (▌4▐ in Figure 112) to turn the threader mechanism gear (▌6▐ in
Figure 112) counterclockwise. This action moves the LBA out of the cartridge and past the read/write
head. Stop this rotation when the LBA is near the tape guide roller nearest the rear of the drive that
is shown as ▌1▐ Figure 113 on page 186.

Appendix D. Manual cartridge removal procedure 185

Figure 113. Leader Block Assembly (LBA)

11. Continue rotating the loader motor worm gear (▌1▐ in Figure 112 on page 185) until the rotator stub
(▌3▐ in Figure 112 on page 185) is positioned as shown. Notice that the rotator stub (▌3▐ in Figure 112
on page 185) is nearly aligned with the cartridge loader tray guide bearing (▌2▐ in Figure 112 on
page 185).
12. Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray.
13. Go to “Ending procedure” on page 193.

Half height drive: Tape tangled along tape path

Note: If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape that contains ACTIVE or 'ONLY COPY' data (there is
no backup), eject commands that are issued at the host fail to unload the tape, and power-cycling the
drive fails to eject the cartridge, make no further attempts to unload this tape. Call Technical Support
and open a PMR if one is not already open, to initiate the process of sending the drive with the loaded
cartridge in for recovery.
1. Carefully pull out excess tape and untangle.

Note: If you find the tape to be broken, go to one of the following appropriate procedures:
v “Half height drive: Tape spooled off supply reel” on page 176
v “Half height drive: Tape pulled from or broken near leader pin” on page 179
–OR–
v “Half height drive: Tape broken in mid-tape” on page 182
2. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.

186 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figure 114. Rewinding tape into cartridge

▌1▐ Loader motor worm gear ▌3▐ Takeup reel motor

▌2▐ Outer guide rail (WARNING: Do ▌4▐ Supply reel motor
Not Touch)

3. Turn the supply reel (▌4▐) clockwise.

4. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within the flanges of the tape
guiding rollers. Turn the supply reel (▌4▐) 10 turns. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
5. Go to “Ending procedure” on page 193.

Full height drive: No apparent failure or damage to tape

Note: If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape that contains ACTIVE or 'ONLY COPY' data (there is
no backup), eject commands that are issued at the host fail to unload the tape, and power-cycling the
drive fails to eject the cartridge, make no further attempts to unload this tape. Call Technical Support
and open a PMR if one is not already open, to initiate the process of sending the drive with the loaded
cartridge in for recovery.
1. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.

Appendix D. Manual cartridge removal procedure 187

Figure 115. The hex wrench rewinds tape into cartridge

2. From the bottom of the drive, locate the access hole (▌1▐ in Figure 115).
3. Insert a 2.5 mm offset hex wrench through the bottom cover access hole and into the reel motor axle.
Begin spooling the tape back into the cartridge by turning the hex wrench clockwise.
4. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within the flanges of the tape
guiding rollers. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape.
5. Locate the threader motor worm gear (▌4▐ in Figure 116 on page 189) on the rear of the drive. Use
your finger to rotate the threader motor worm gear and slowly rotate the threader mechanism gear
(▌6▐ in Figure 116 on page 189) clockwise. This action rotates the threader motor worm gear (▌4▐ in
Figure 116 on page 189) clockwise, drawing the LBA into the cartridge.

188 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figure 116. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train.

▌1▐ Loader motor worm gear ▌6▐ Threader mechanism gear

▌2▐ Cartridge loader tray guide bearing ▌7▐ Lever
▌3▐ Rotator stub ▌8▐ Loader mechanism gear
▌4▐ Threader motor worm gear
▌5▐ Threader intermediate gear

6. As the tape leader block assembly (LBA) is secured in the cartridge, you hear the LBA retention
spring clips click into place. If you do not hear the click, continue rolling until the threader motor
worm gear (▌4▐ in Figure 116) stops. The LBA is in the correct position.

Note: Be sure to keep tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the cartridge by using a hex
wrench as shown in Figure 115 on page 188.
7. Notice these mechanisms:
a. Loader mechanism gear (▌6▐ in Figure 116) nearest the front of the drive that actuates the
cartridge loader mechanism.
b. Position of the rotate stub (▌3▐ in Figure 116).
c. Front loader motor worm gear (▌1▐ in Figure 116). Rotating this gear allows the loader
mechanism gear (▌8▐ in Figure 116) to turn.
8. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (▌1▐ in Figure 116) to turn the loader mechanism gear (▌6▐ in
Figure 116) counterclockwise. Continue turning until the rotator stub (▌3▐ in Figure 116) loses contact
with the lever (▌7▐ in Figure 116). This action releases the LBA leader pin.
9. Rotate the threader motor worm gear (▌4▐ in Figure 116) to turn the threader mechanism gear (▌6▐ in
Figure 116) counterclockwise. This action moves the LBA out of the cartridge and past the read/write
head. Stop this rotation when the LBA is near the tape guide roller nearest the rear of the drive that
is shown as ▌1▐ Figure 117 on page 190.

Appendix D. Manual cartridge removal procedure 189

Figure 117. Leader Block Assembly (LBA)

10. Continue rotating the loader motor worm gear (▌1▐ in Figure 116 on page 189) until the rotator stub
(▌3▐ in Figure 116 on page 189) is positioned as shown. Notice that the rotator stub (▌3▐ in Figure 116
on page 189) is nearly aligned with the cartridge loader tray guide bearing (▌2▐ in Figure 116 on
page 189).
11. Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray.
12. Go to “Ending procedure” on page 193.

Half height drive: No apparent failure or damage to tape

Note: If the cartridge in the drive is an INPUT tape that contains ACTIVE or 'ONLY COPY' data (there is
no backup), eject commands that are issued at the host fail to unload the tape, and power-cycling the
drive fails to eject the cartridge, make no further attempts to unload this tape. Call Technical Support
and open a PMR if one is not already open, to initiate the process of sending the drive with the loaded
cartridge in for recovery.
1. Set the drive on its left side with the head and tape path facing up.

190 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Figure 118. Rewinding tape into cartridge

▌1▐ Loader motor worm gear ▌3▐ Takeup reel motor

▌2▐ Outer guide rail (WARNING: Do ▌4▐ Supply reel motor
Not Touch)

2. Begin spooling the tape back into the cartridge by turning the supply reel motor (▌4▐) clockwise.
3. Continue spooling into the cartridge until the tape is taut and remains within the flanges of the tape
guiding rollers. Ensure that you do not stretch the tape. Continue spooling until all tape is removed
from the takeup reel (▌3▐).
4. Locate the threader intermediate gear (▌1▐) near the rear of the drive. You can use your finger to
rotate the threader intermediate gear (▌1▐) and slowly rotate the threader mechanism gear (▌2▐)
clockwise. This action draws the tape leader block assembly (LBA) into the cartridge.

Appendix D. Manual cartridge removal procedure 191

Figure 119. Drive with cover removed to reveal gear train.

▌1▐ Threader intermediate ▌2▐ Threader mechanism gear ▌3▐ Loader motor worm gear
gear

5. As the leader pin is secured in the cartridge, you hear the leader pin retention spring clips click into
place. If you do not hear the click, continue rolling until the threader intermediate gear (▌1▐) stops.
The LBA is in the correct position.

Note: Be sure to keep tension on the tape as the LBA is drawn into the cartridge.
6. Rotate the loader intermediate gear (▌1▐) clockwise as viewed from the front of the drive until it
stops. This action releases the LBA leader pin.
7. Rotate the threader motor worm gear (▌3▐) counterclockwise until the leader block is in front of the
read/write head. This action moves the LBA out of the cartridge.

Figure 120. Leader Block Assembly (LBA)

▌1▐ Loader motor worm gear ▌2▐ Leader block assembly (LBA)

8. Rotate the loader motor worm gear (▌3▐) counterclockwise as viewed from the front of the drive
until it stops.
9. Remove the cartridge from the cartridge loader tray.
10. Go to “Ending procedure” on page 193.

192 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Ending procedure
1. Reassemble the drive brick by reversing the steps in “Removing the drive cover” on page 173.
2. Reassemble the drive sled and reinstall the drive brick by completing these steps:
v Plug in the RS-422 cable, the power cable (if applicable), and the signal cable.
v Push the drive brick fully into the sled.
v Align the two screws holes on each side of the sled with the screw holes on each side of the drive
brick. DO NOT TIGHTEN THE SCREWS COMPLETELY.
v When the drive and sled are properly aligned, fully tighten the screws.
3. Install the tape drive sled in the library.
4. Power ON the library and wait for the library to finish POST (power on self test), inventory, and
mid-tape recovery. This step can take up to 1 hour.
5. If the cartridge does not eject from the drive, move the cartridge from the drive to the I/O station,
then discard the cartridge.
v Operator Panel: Operation > Move Cartridge from Drive to Home Slot
v Management GUI: Drives > Actions > Eject Cartridge from Drive
6. Run Library Verify before normal library operations resume.
7. If necessary, return the failed drive sled to IBM.

Appendix D. Manual cartridge removal procedure 193

194 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Appendix E. Accessibility
Accessibility features help a user who has a physical disability, such as restricted mobility or limited
vision, to use the HTML version of the customer documentation successfully.

Features

The major accessibility features for the HTML version of this document are:
v You can use screen-reader software and a digital speech synthesizer to hear what is displayed on the
screen. The following screen readers are tested: WebKing and Window-Eyes.
v You can operate all features with the keyboard instead of the mouse.

Navigating by keyboard
You can use keys or key combinations to complete operations and initiate many menu actions that are
also done through mouse actions. You can navigate the HTML version of the IBM TS4300 Tape Library
Setup, Operator, and Service Guide help system from the keyboard with the following key combinations:
v To traverse to the next link, button, or topic, press Tab inside a frame (page).
v To move to the previous topic, press ^ or Shift+Tab.
v To scroll all the way up or down, press Home or End.
v To print the current page or active frame, press Ctrl+P.
v To select, press Enter.

Accessing the publications

You can view the publications for this library in Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) with the Adobe
Acrobat Reader. The PDFs are provided at the following website: [Link]
support/ .

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 195

196 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Notices
This information was developed for products and services that are offered in the US. This material might
be available from IBM in other languages. However, you might be required to own a copy of the product
or product version in that language in order to access it.

IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries.
Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in
your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that
only that IBM product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,
or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is
the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-IBM product, program, or
service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this
document. The furnishing of this document does not grant you any license to these patents. You can send
license inquiries, in writing, to:

IBM Director of Licensing

IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive, MD-NC119
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
US

For license inquiries regarding double-byte character set (DBCS) information, contact the IBM Intellectual
Property Department in your country or send inquiries, in writing, to:

Intellectual Property Licensing

Legal and Intellectual Property Law
IBM Japan Ltd.
19-21, Nihonbashi-Hakozakicho, Chuo-ku
Tokyo 103-8510, Japan

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS"

WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically
made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication.
IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM websites are provided for convenience only and do not in
any manner serve as an endorsement of those websites. The materials at those websites are not part of
the materials for this IBM product and use of those websites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you provide in any way it believes appropriate without
incurring any obligation to you.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 197

Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling: (i) the
exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs (including this
one) and (ii) the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged, should contact:

IBM Director of Licensing

IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive, MD-NC119
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
US

Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions, including in some cases,
payment of a fee.

The licensed program described in this document and all licensed material available for it are provided
by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement, IBM International Program License Agreement or
any equivalent agreement between us.

The performance data discussed herein is presented as derived under specific operating conditions.
Actual results may vary.

The client examples cited are presented for illustrative purposes only. Actual performance results may
vary depending on specific configurations and operating conditions.

The performance data and client examples cited are presented for illustrative purposes only. Actual
performance results may vary depending on specific configurations and operating conditions.

Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their
published announcements or other publicly available sources. IBM has not tested those products and
cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to
non-IBMproducts. Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the
suppliers of those products.

Statements regarding IBM's future direction or intent are subject to change or withdrawal without notice,
and represent goals and objectives only.

All IBM prices shown are IBM's suggested retail prices, are current and are subject to change without
notice. Dealer prices may vary.

This information is for planning purposes only. The information herein is subject to change before the
products described become available.

This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations. To illustrate
them as completely as possible, the examples include the names of individuals, companies, brands, and
products. All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to actual people or business enterprises is
entirely coincidental.

COPYRIGHT LICENSE:

This information contains sample application programs in source language, which illustrate programming
techniques on various operating platforms. You may copy, modify, and distribute these sample programs
in any form without payment to IBM, for the purposes of developing, using, marketing or distributing
application programs conforming to the application programming interface for the operating platform for
which the sample programs are written. These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all
conditions. IBM, therefore, cannot guarantee or imply reliability, serviceability, or function of these
programs. The sample programs are provided "AS IS", without warranty of any kind. IBM shall not be
liable for any damages arising out of your use of the sample programs.

198 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Each copy or any portion of these sample programs or any derivative work
must include a copyright notice as follows:
© (your company name) (year).
Portions of this code are derived from IBM Corp. Sample Programs.
© Copyright IBM Corp. _enter the year or years_.

If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color illustrations may not appear.

Trademarks
A list of trademarks for IBM and other companies.

IBM, the IBM logo, and [Link]® are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business
Machines Corp., registered in many jurisdictions worldwide. Other product and service names might be
trademarks of IBM or other companies. A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the web at
Copyright and trademark information at [Link]/legal/[Link].

Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks
of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States, and/or other countries.

IT Infrastructure Library is a registered trademark of the Central Computer and Telecommunications

Agency which is now part of the Office of Government Commerce.

Intel, Intel logo, Intel Inside, Intel Inside logo, Intel Centrino, Intel Centrino logo, Celeron, Intel Xeon,
Intel SpeedStep, Itanium, and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its
subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States, other countries, or both.

ITIL is a registered trademark, and a registered community trademark of The Minister for the Cabinet
Office, and is registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.

Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or
its affiliates.

Cell Broadband Engine is a trademark of Sony Computer Entertainment, Inc. in the United States, other
countries, or both and is used under license therefrom.

Linear Tape-Open, LTO, the LTO Logo, Ultrium, and the Ultrium logo are trademarks of HP, IBM Corp.
and Quantum in the U.S. and other countries.

Electromagnetic compatibility notices

The following Class A statements apply to IBM products and their features unless designated as
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Class B in the feature information.

When attaching a monitor to the equipment, you must use the designated monitor cable and any
interference suppression devices that are supplied with the monitor.

Notices 199
Canada Notice
CAN ICES-3 (A)/NMB-3(A)

European Community and Morocco Notice

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of Directive 2014/30/EU of the European
Parliament and of the Council on the harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection
requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of
non-IBM option cards.

This product may cause interference if used in residential areas. Such use must be avoided unless the
user takes special measures to reduce electromagnetic emissions to prevent interference to the reception
of radio and television broadcasts.

Warning: This equipment is compliant with Class A of CISPR 32. In a residential environment this
equipment may cause radio interference.

Germany Notice
Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis: Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur
Elektromagnetischen Verträglichkeit

Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2014/30/EU zur Angleichung der
Rechtsvorschriften über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaatenund hält die
Grenzwerte der EN 55032 Klasse A ein.

Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu
betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der IBM empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. IBM
übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne
Zustimmung von IBM verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne
Empfehlung von IBM gesteckt/eingebaut werden.

EN 55032 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden:

“Warnung: Dieses ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich
Funk-Störungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene
Maßnahmen zu ergreifen und dafür aufzukommen.”

Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten
Dieses Produkt entspricht dem “Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten
(EMVG).” Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2014/30/EU in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.

Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von
Geräten (EMVG) (bzw. der EMC Richtlinie 2014/30/EU) für Geräte der Klasse A

Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformitätszeichen
- CE - zu führen.

Verantwortlich für die Einhaltung der EMV-Vorschriften ist der Hersteller:

International Business Machines Corp.

New Orchard Road
Armonk, New York 10504
Tel: 914-499-1900

Der verantwortliche Ansprechpartner des Herstellers in der EU ist:

200 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
IBM Deutschland GmbH
Technical Relations Europe, Abteilung M456
IBM-Allee 1, 71139 Ehningen, Germany
Tel: +49 800 225 5426
e-mail: Halloibm@[Link]

Generelle Informationen:

Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55032 Klasse A.

Japan Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) Notice

Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association

(JEITA) Notice

This statement applies to products less than or equal to 20 A per phase.

This statement applies to products greater than 20 A, single phase.

This statement applies to products greater than 20 A per phase, three-phase.

Notices 201
Korea Notice

People's Republic of China Notice

Taiwan Notice

IBM Taiwan Contact Information:

202 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Russia Notice

United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Notice

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission
limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than
recommended cables and connectors, or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment.
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device might not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that might cause undesired operation.

Notices 203
204 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Glossary
This glossary defines the special terms, abbreviations, and acronyms that are used in this publication. If
you do not find the term that you are looking for, refer to the index or to the Dictionary of Computing,
1994.

Numbers
2:1 compression
The relationship between the quantity of data that can be stored with compression as compared
to the quantity of data that can be stored without compression. In 2:1 compression, twice as much
data can be stored with compression as can be stored without compression.
2.5:1 compression
The relationship between the quantity of data that can be stored with compression as compared
to the quantity of data that can be stored without compression. In 2.5:1 compression,
two-and-a-half times as much data can be stored with compression as can be stored without
compression.
3U This library requires 3 units (3U) of rack space.

A
A Ampere.
AC Alternating current.
Access method
A technique for moving data between main storage and input or output devices.
Accessor
This component contains the library robot and bar code reader. The accessor moves cartridges to
and from the I/O Station, storage slots, and tape drives.
Adapter card
A circuit board that adds function to a computer.
Adj Adjustment.
Administrator (Admin)
The Admin role has access to all menus except those menus that are restricted to Service only.
The default password is adm001, and the default PIN is 0000.
AH Authentication Header. An Internet Protocol intended to guarantee connectionless integrity and
data origin authentication of IP datagrams. Further, it can optionally protect against replay attacks
by using the sliding window technique and discarding old packets.
AIX Advanced Interactive Executive. IBM's implementation of the UNIX operating system. The
System p system, among others, uses AIX as its operating system.
Alphanumeric
Pertaining to a character set that contains letters, numerals, and other characters, such as
punctuation marks.
Alter To change.
Ambient temperature
The temperature of air or other media in a designated area, particularly the area that is
surrounding equipment.
AME Application Managed Encryption.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 205

ampere (A)
A unit of measure for electric current that is equivalent to a flow of 1 coulomb per second, or to
the current produced by 1 volt applied across a resistance of 1 ohm.
ANSI American National Standards Institute.
API Application planning interface. A set of clearly defined methods of communication between
various software components.
Application-managed encryption
Tape encryption that is controlled by an application.
Archive
To collect and store files in a designated place.
ASCII American National Standard Code for Information Interchange. A 7 bit coded character set (8 bits
including parity check) that consists of control characters and graphic characters.
Assigning a device
The establishing of the relationship of a device to a running task, process, job, or program.
Assignment
The naming of a specific device to complete a function.
Asynchronous
Pertaining to two or more processes that do not depend upon the occurrence of specific events
such as common timing signals.
Attention (notice)
A word for calling attention to the possibility of danger to a program, device, or system, or to
data. Contrast with caution and danger.
ATTN Attention.
Authentication Header (AH)
A member of the IPSec protocol suite. AH guarantees connectionless integrity and data origin
authentication of IP packets.

B
Backup
To make extra copies of documents or software for safekeeping.
Bar code
A code that represents characters by sets of parallel bars of varying thickness and separation,
which are read optically by transverse scanning.
Bar code label
Paper bearing a bar code and having an adhesive backing. The bar code label must be affixed to
a tape cartridge to enable the library to identify the cartridge and its volume serial number.
Bar code reader
A laser device that is specialized for scanning and reading bar codes and converting them into
either the ASCII or EBCDIC digital character code.
Bezel Decorative and safety cover.
Bicolored
Having two colors.
bit Either of the digits 0 or 1 when used in the binary numbering system.
BOM or bill of materials
A list of specific types and amounts of direct materials that are expected to be used to produce a
specific job or quantity of output.

206 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)
BGP is the core routing protocol of the Internet. It works by maintaining a table of IP networks or
'prefixes' that designate network reachability among autonomous systems (AS).
BRMS Backup Recovery and Media Services.
Browser
A client program that initiates requests to a web server and displays the information that the
server returns.
Buffer
A routine or storage that is used to compensate for a difference in rate of flow of data or time of
occurrence of events, when data is transferred from one device to another.
Bus A facility for transferring data between several devices that are located between two end points,
only one device able to transmit at a specified moment.
byte A string that consists of some bits (usually 8) that are treated as a unit and represent a character.
A fundamental data unit.

C
CA Certificate Authority.
CA certification
In cryptography, a certificate from a certificate authority (CA).
Capacity
The amount of data that can be contained on storage media and expressed in bytes of data.
Cartridge manual rewind tool
A device that can be fitted into the reel of a cartridge and used to rewind tape into or out of the
cartridge.
Cartridge memory (CM)
Within each data cartridge, an embedded electronics and interface module that can store and
retrieve a cartridge's historical usage and other information.
Cartridge storage slot
Individual slot that is located within a magazine that is used to house tape cartridges.
Caution (notice)
A word to call attention to possible personal harm to people. Contrast with attention and danger.
CD Compact Disc. A disc, usually 4.75 inches in diameter, from which data is read optically by using
a laser.
CE Customer engineer, field engineer, service representative.
Centimeter (cm)
One one-hundredth of a meter (0.01 m). Approximately 0.39 inches.
Channel command
An instruction that directs a data channel, control unit, or device to run an operation or set of
operations.
Char Character.
CHK Check.
Cleaning cartridge
A tape cartridge that is used to clean the heads of a tape drive. Contrast with data cartridge.
CM Cartridge Memory. Within each data cartridge, an embedded electronics and interface module
that can store and retrieve a cartridge's historical usage and other information.

Glossary 207
CoD Capacity on-demand.
Command
A control signal that initiates an action or the start of a sequence of actions.
Compact disc (CD)
A disk, usually 4.75 inches in diameter, from which data is read optically by using a laser.
Compression
The process of eliminating gaps, empty fields, redundancies, and unnecessary data to shorten the
length of records or blocks.
Concurrent
Refers to diagnostic procedures that can be run on one control unit while the rest of the
subsystem remains available for customer applications.
Contingent connection
A connection between a channel path and a drive that is caused when a unit check occurs during
an I/O operation.
Controller
A device that provides the interface between a system and one or more tape drives.
Control path drive
ControllerA device that provides the interface between a system and one or more tape
[Link] path drive A drive that communicates messages from the host computer to the
library in which the drive is installed.
Cookie
A packet of data that is exchanged between the library and a web browser to track configuration.
CP Circuit protector.
CPF Control Path Failover.
CRU Customer Replaceable Unit.
CSA Canadian Standards Association.
Ctrl Control.
CU Control unit.

D
Danger (notice)
A word to call attention to possible lethal harm to people. Contrast with attention and caution.
Data Any representations such as characters or analog quantities to which meaning is or might be
assigned.
Data buffer
The storage buffer in the control unit. This buffer is used to increase the data transfer rate
between the control unit and the channel.
Data cartridge
A tape cartridge that is dedicated to storing data. Contrast with cleaning cartridge.
Data check
A synchronous or asynchronous indication of a condition that is caused by invalid data or
incorrect positioning of data.
DC Direct current.
DCS Designated Cleaning Slot.

208 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Degauss
Makes a magnetic tape nonmagnetic by using electrical coils that carry currents that neutralize
the magnetism of the tape.
Degausser
A device that makes magnetic tape nonmagnetic.
Degradation
A decrease in quality of output or throughput or an increase in machine error rate.
Degraded
Decreased in quality of output or throughput or increased machine error rate.
Deserialize
To change from serial-by-bit to parallel-by-byte.
Detented
A part that is held in position with a catch or lever.
Device
Any hardware component or peripheral device, such as a tape drive or tape library, that can
receive and send data.
Device driver
A file that contains the code that is needed to use an attached device.
DHCPv6
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6. Although IPv6's stateless address
autoconfiguration removes the primary motivation for DHCP in IPv4, DHCPv6 can still be used
to statefully assign addresses if the network administrator wants more control over addressing.
DH group
Diffie-Hellman group.
DIAG
Diagnostic section of maintenance information manual.
Differential
See High Voltage Differential (HVD).
Direct-access storage
A storage device in which the access time is independent of the location of the data.
Display contrast
The brightness of the display on the Operator Panel.
DLL Dynamic Link Library. The Microsoft implementation of the shared library concept. These
libraries usually have the file extension dll, ocs (for libraries that contain activeX controls, or drv
(for legacy system drivers).
DNS Directory Name System. This system allows the library to recognize text-based addresses instead
of numeric IP addresses.
Download
To transfer programs or data from a computer to a connected device, typically a personal
computer.
To transfer data from a computer to a connected device, such as a workstation or personal
computer.
DPF Data Path Failover.
DRAM
Dynamic random-access memory.

Glossary 209
Drive, magnetic tape
A mechanism for moving magnetic tape and controlling its movement.
Drive Not Configured
This message occurs during the first boot after a factory settings restore is run. This message is
not a real issue since it takes time for the library to configure.
DRV Drive.
DSA key
Encryption key type.
DSE Data security erase.
DSP Digital signal processor.

E
EBCDIC
Extended binary-coded decimal interchange code.
EC Edge connector. Engineering change.
ECC Error correction code.
EEB Ethernet Expansion Blade.
EEPROM
Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory.
EIA Electronics Industries Association.
EIA unit
A unit of measure, which is established by the Electronic Industries Association, equal to 44.45
millimeters (1.75 inches).
Eject To remove or force out from within.
EKM Encryption Key Manager.
Electronic mail
Correspondence in the form of messages that are transmitted between user terminals over a
computer network.
Email See electronic mail.
Encryption
A method of storing data in a format that helps protect data from inadvertent or deliberate
compromise. An encryption-enabled drive contains the necessary hardware and firmware to
encrypt and decrypt host tape application data. Encryption policy and encryption keys are
provided by the host application or host server.
Encryption key manager (EKM)
A software program that assists IBM-encrypting tape drives in generating, protecting, storing, and
maintaining encryption keys that encrypt information that is written to and decrypt information
that is read from tape media.
Entitlement
IBM Entitlement is the official right to receive service and support for your tape library.
EPO Emergency power off.
EPROM
Erasable programmable read only memory.
EQC Equipment check.

210 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Equipment check
An asynchronous indication of a malfunction.
Error log
A data set or file in a product or system where error information is stored for later access.
ESD Electrostatic discharge.
ESP Encapsulating Security Payload. An Internet Protocol that provides origin authenticity, integrity,
and confidentiality protection of a packet. ESP also supports encryption-only and
authentication-only configurations, but encryption without authentication is discouraged because
it is insecure.

F
FAT32 FAT stands for File Allocation Table. FAT32 is an extension which means that data is stored in
chunks of 32 bits. Any USB flash drive that is used for updating firmware or exporting logs for
the TS4300 library must be in this format.
Fault symptom code (FSC)
A hexadecimal code that is generated by the drive or the control unit microcode in response to a
detected subsystem error.
FC Fibre Channel, Feature code.
FCC Federal communications commission.
FE Field engineer, customer engineer, or service representative.
FH Full Height.
Fibre Channel
A high-speed method to connect data storage to a server. The British spelling of "Fibre" is used
because the technology can be used with either fiber optic or copper cables. Thus, the name does
not imply that it can be used only with a fiber optic cable.
Fiducial
A target that is used for teaching a physical location to a robot.
Field replaceable unit (FRU)
An assembly that is replaced in its entirety when any one of its components fails.
File A named set of records that are stored or processed as a unit. Also referred to as a data set.
File protection
The processes and procedures that are established in an information system that are designed to
inhibit unauthorized access to, contamination of, or deletion of a file.
File transfer protocol (FTP)
In the Internet suite of protocols, an application layer protocol that uses TCP and Telnet services
to transfer bulk-data files between machines or hosts.
Firmware
Proprietary code that is delivered as microcode as part of an operating system. Firmware is more
efficient than software loaded from an alterable medium and more adaptable to change than pure
hardware circuitry. An example of firmware is the Basic input/output system (BIOS) in read-only
memory (ROM) on a PC system board.
FLASH EEPROM
An electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) that can be updated.
FMR Field microcode replacement.
Format
The arrangement or layout of data on a data medium.

Glossary 211
Formatter
Part of a magnetic tape subsystem that runs data conversion, speed matching, encoding,
first-level error recovery, and interfaces to one or more tape drives.
FP File protect.
Frayed
Damaged as if by an abrasive substance.
FRU Field replaceable unit.
FSC Fault symptom code.
FSI Fault symptom index.
FTSS Field Technical Sales Support.
Functional microcode
Microcode that is resident in the machine during normal customer operation.

G
g Gram.
GB gigabyte.
GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter.
Gb/s gigabits/second
Gbit gigabit
gigabit (Gbit)
1 000 000 000 bits.
gigabyte (GB)
1 000 000 000 bytes.
Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC)
Converts copper interface to optic interface.
Gnd Ground.
GUI Graphical User Interface

H
HBA Host Bus Adapter.
HD Slot Technology
High-density (HD) slot technology. Allows multiple cartridges to be stored in a tiered
architecture.
hertz (Hz)
Unit of frequency. 1 hertz equals one cycle per second.
hex Hexadecimal.
HH Half Height.
High Voltage Differential (HVD)
A logic-signaling system that enables data communication between a supported host and the
library. HVD signaling uses a paired plus and minus signal level to reduce the effects of noise on
the SCSI bus. Any noise that is injected into the signal is present in both a plus and minus state,
and is canceled. Synonymous with differential.
HVD SCSI Bus High-Voltage Differential.

212 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Hz Hertz (cycles per second).

I
IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager (SKLM)
IBM's EKM application that assists encrypting tape drives in generating, protecting, storing, and
maintaining encryption keys that encrypt information that is written to and decrypt information
that is read from tape media.
IBM Spectrum Archive
Formerly known as Linear Tape File System (LTFS). A file system that works with LTO
Generation tape technology to access data stored on an IBM tape cartridge.
IBM Ultrium Tape Drive
Located within the library, a data-storage device that controls the movement of the magnetic tape
in an IBM LTO Ultrium Tape Cartridge. The drive houses the mechanism (drive head) that reads
and writes data to the tape.
ID Identifier.
Identifier (ID)
(1) In programming languages, a lexical unit that names a language object. For example, the
names of variables, arrays, records, labels, or procedures. An identifier usually consists of a letter
optionally followed by letters, digits, or other characters. (2) One or more characters that are used
to identify or name data element and possibly to indicate certain properties of that data element.
(3) A sequence of bits or characters that identifies a program, device, or system to another
program, device, or system.
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission.
IKE Internet Key Exchange that is used in the IPSec protocol.
IML Initial microprogram load.
Incompatible magazine
This message might display on the Operator Panel during library initialization. It occurs during
factory restore or VPD. This message is not a real issue since it takes time for the library to
configure.
Initial microprogram load (IML)
The action of loading a microprogram from external storage to writable control storage.
Initiator
The component that runs a command. The initiator can be the host system or the tape control
unit.
INST Installation.
Interface
A shared boundary. An interface might be a hardware component to link two devices or it might
be a portion of storage or registers accessed by two or more computer programs.
Internet Key Exchange (IKE)
The protocol that is used to set up a security association (SA) in the IPSec protocol suite. See also
Security Association (SA).
Internet Protocol Version 4 (IPv4)
See IPv4.
Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6)
See IPv6.
Interposer
The part that is used to convert a 68-pin connector to a 50-pin D-shell connector.

Glossary 213
Intervention required
Manual action is needed.
INTRO
Introduction.
I/O Input/output.
I/O Station
Cartridge location that is dedicated for the insertion of cartridges into and the removal of
cartridges from the library.
IOP Input/output processor.
IP Internet Protocol.
IP address
An identifier for a computer or device on an Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) network. Networks that
use the TCP/IP protocol route messages that are based on the IP address of the destination. See
IPv4 and IPv6.
IPL Initial program load.
IPSec (IP Security)
A set of protocols for securing IPv6 network communications by authentication and encryption.
IP Stack
A TCP/IP protocol stack that manages static IP addresses.
IPv4 A network layer protocol for packet-switched networks. IPv4 supports 232 (about 4.3 billion)
addresses.
IPv6 A network layer protocol for packet-switched networks. It is the designated successor of IPv4 for
general use on the Internet. The main improvement of IPv6 is the increase in the number of
addresses available for networked devices, allowing, for example, each mobile phone and mobile
electronic device to have its own unique address.
ISV Independent software vendor.
ITDT IBM Tape Diagnostic tool.
ITST Idle-time self-test.

K
Kerberos
Kerberos Authentication is a standard (RFC 1510) third-party authentication protocol that
provides end-to-end security for distributed computing environments.
kilogram (kg)
1000 grams (approximately 2.2 pounds).
km kilometer. 1000 Meters, Approximately 5/8 mile.
KMIP Key Management Interoperability Protocol.

L
LAN Local area network. A computer network within a limited area.
LCB Library Control Blade.
LCD See liquid crystal display.
LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. This protocol allows the library to use login and password
information that is stored on a server to grant access to the library functions.

214 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
LDAPS
Secure LDAP over SSL.
LDI Library Drive Interface.
LED Light-emitting diode.
Library certification
In cryptography, a certificate that is provided by the library.
Library-managed encryption
Tape encryption that is controlled by the tape library.
Linear Tape-Open (LTO)
A type of tape storage technology that is developed by the IBM Corporation, Hewlett-Packard,
and Quantum. LTO technology is an "open format" technology, which means that its users have
multiple sources of product and media. The "open" nature of LTO technology enables
compatibility between different vendors' offerings by ensuring that vendors comply with
verification standards. The LTO technology is implemented in two formats: the Accelis format
focuses on fast access; the Ultrium format focuses on high capacity. The Ultrium format is the
preferred format when capacity (rather than fast access) is the key storage consideration. An
Ultrium cartridge has a compressed data capacity of up to 30 TB (2.5:1 compression) and a native
data capacity of up to 12 TB.
Liquid crystal display (LCD)
A low-power display technology that is used in computers and other I/O devices.
Loadable
The ability to be loaded.
LME Library Managed Encryption.
LTO See Linear Tape-Open.
LTO cartridge memory (LTO-CM)
Within each LTO Ultrium data cartridge, an embedded electronics and interface module that can
store and retrieve a cartridge's historical usage and other information.
LUN Logical Unit Number.
LVD SCSI Bus Low Voltage Differential.

M
M8 LTO 8 Type M Cartridge.
MAC address
The Media Access Control address of a computer networking device.
Magnetic tape
A tape with a magnetic surface layer on which data can be stored by magnetic recording.
Management GUI
Web User Interface, Web UI, Web GUI.
MAP Maintenance analysis procedure.
Mask A pattern of characters that controls the retention or elimination of portions of another pattern of
characters. To use a pattern of characters to control the retention or elimination of portions of
another pattern of characters.
Master file
A file that is used as an authority in a job and that is relatively permanent, even though its
contents might change. Synonymous with main file.

Glossary 215
Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)
The size of the largest packet that a network protocol can transmit.
MB Megabyte (expressed as data rate in MB/s or MB/second).
Media capacity
The amount of data that can be contained on a storage medium, expressed in bytes of data.
Media-type identifier
Pertaining to the bar code on the bar code label of the IBM Ultrium tape cartridge, a
two-character code, L1, that represents information about the cartridge. L identifies the cartridge
as one that can be read by devices that incorporate LTO technology; 1 indicates that it is the first
generation of its type.
Mega One million of.
meter In the Metric System, the basic unit of length equal to approximately 39.37 inches.
MIB Management Information Base. Information repository that is used by SNMP.
Micro One millionth of.
Microcode
(1) One or more micro instructions. (2) A code, representing the instructions of an instruction set,
which is implemented in a part of storage that is not program-addressable. (3) To design, write,
and test one or more micro instructions. (4) See also microprogram.
Microdiagnostic routine
A program that runs under the control of a supervisor, usually to identify field replaceable units.
Microdiagnostic utility
A program that is run by the customer engineer to test the machine.
Microinstruction
A basic or elementary machine instruction.
Microprogram
A group of micro instructions that when run completes a planned function.
The term microprogram represents a dynamic arrangement or selection of one or more groups of
micro instructions for execution to complete a particular function. The term microcode represents
microinstructions that are used in a product as an alternative to hard-wired circuitry to
implement certain functions of a processor or other system component.
MIM Media information message.
mm Millimeter.
Modifier
That which changes the meaning.
Monitor
The Monitor role is an interchangeable term corresponding to the User role. The Monitor role has
viewing privileges to the unit, but is not able to make configuration changes.
Mount a device
To assign an I/O device with a request to the operator.
MP Microprocessor.
ms Millisecond.
MSG Message.
Multipath
Pertaining to using more than one path.

216 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
N
N/A Not applicable.
Network Address Translation (NAT)
NAT involves rewriting the source or destination addresses of IP packets as they pass through a
router or firewall. Most systems that use NAT do so to enable multiple hosts on a private
network to access the Internet over a single public IP address.
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
Node In a network, a point at which one or more functional units connect channels or data circuits.
NTFS New Technology File System. The primary file system that is used in Windows.
NTP Network Time Protocol. This protocol allows the library to set its internal date and time that is
based on the date and time of a server.
NVS Nonvolatile storage. A storage device whose contents are not lost when power is cut off.

O
OCP Operator Panel (Operator Control Panel).
Oersted
The unit of magnetic field strength in the unrationalized centimeter-gram-second (cgs)
electromagnetic system. The oersted is the magnetic field strength in the interior of an elongated,
uniformly wound solenoid that is excited with a linear current density in its winding of`1 ampere
per 4π centimeters of axial length.
Offline
Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit without the continual control of a computer.
Contrast with online.
Online
Pertaining to the operation of a functional unit that is under the continual control of a computer.
Contrast with offline.
OPER Operation.
OV Over voltage.
Overrun
Loss of data because a receiving device is unable to accept data at the rate it is transmitted.
Overtightening
To tighten too much.

P
Parameter
A variable that is given a constant value for a specified application and that might denote the
application.
p bit Parity bit.
PC Parity check.
PCC Power control compartment.
PDF Portable Document Format.
PE Parity error. Product engineer.
PFS Perfect forward secrecy.

Glossary 217
 Pick Pertaining to the library to remove, by using a robotic device, a tape cartridge from a storage slot
or drive.
Picker A robotic mechanism that is located inside the library that moves cartridges between the cartridge
storage slots and the drive.
PM Preventive maintenance.
POR Power-on reset.
Port A physical connection for communication between the 3590 and the host processor. The 3590 has
2 SCSI ports.
Portable Document Format (PDF)
A standard that is specified by Adobe Systems, Incorporated, for the electronic distribution of
documents. PDF files are compact, can be distributed globally (by way of email, the web,
intranets, or CD-ROM), and can be viewed with the Acrobat Reader. Acrobat Reader is software
from Adobe Systems that can be downloaded at no cost from the Adobe Systems home page.
Private key
A cryptographic key that is used to decrypt a message.
PROM
Programmable read only memory.
PS Power supply.
PTF Program temporary fix. A single bugfix or group of bugfixes that are distributed in a form ready
to install for customers.
PWR Power.

R
Rack A unit that houses the components of a storage subsystem, such as the library.
Rackmount kit
A packaged collection of articles that are used to install the rack-mounted version of the library.
RAM Random access memory.
Random access memory
A storage device into which data is entered and from which data is retrieved in a nonsequential
manner.
| Random Mode
| In Random mode, the library allows the server's (host's) application software to select any data
| cartridge in any order.
RAS Reliability, availability, and serviceability.
Record
A collection of related data or words, which are treated as a unit.
Recording density
The number of bits in a single linear track measured per unit of length of the recording medium.
Recoverable error
An error condition that allows continued execution of a program.
Ref Reference.
Reg Register.
Reinventory
To inventory again.

218 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
 REST Representational state transfer. Part of an API. REST systems aim for fast performance, reliability,
and the ability to grow, by reusing components that can be managed and updated without
affecting the system as a whole, even while it is running.
Retension
The process or function of tightening the tape onto the cartridge, if it is sensed that the tape has a
loose wrap on the cartridge.
RFC (Request for Comments)
Request for Comments (RFC) documents are a series of memoranda, which encompasses new
research, innovations, and methodologies applicable to Internet technologies.
RH Relative humidity.
RID tag
Repair identification tag.
RML Rack Mount Line.
Robot Picker.
Robotic Assembly
The picker, picker assembly.
Robotics
Picker assembly.
Root CA certification
In cryptography, a root certificate from a certificate authority (CA).
RPQ Request for price quotation.
RSA key
Encryption key type.
R/W read/write.

S
s Seconds of time.
SAC Service Action Code. Code that is developed to indicate possible FRU or FRUs to replace to
repair the hardware.
SAN Storage area network.
SAS Serial Attached SCSI. A computer bus technology and serial communication protocol for direct
attached storage devices. SAS is a replacement for parallel SCSI with higher speeds, but still uses
SCSI commands.
Scratch cartridge
A data cartridge that contains no useful data, but can be written to with new data.
SCD Single Character Display.
SCSI Small computer system interface.
SE Single-ended.
| Sequential Mode
| Sequential Mode is intended to be used by host applications that aren’t supporting SCSI media
| changer devices but need to get another cartridge loaded if the current cartridge is full.
Segment
A part.
Sel Select.

Glossary 219
Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)
A drive with a SAS interface can be linked directly to controllers. SAS is a performance
improvement over traditional SCSI because SAS enables multiple devices (up to 128) of different
sizes and types to be connected simultaneously with thinner and longer cables. It supports
full-duplex signal transmission up to 3 Gb/s. In addition, SAS drives can be hot-plugged.
Serialize
To change from parallel-by-byte to serial-by-bit.
Serializer
A device that converts a space distribution of simultaneous states, which represents data into a
corresponding time sequence of states.
Service
Access to this level is for Service personnel only - Service personnel have access to all menus.
The service user requires an administrator user password in addition to the service password.
Servo, servos
An adjective for use in qualifying some part or aspect of a servomechanism.
Servomechanism
A feedback control system in which at least one of the system signals represents mechanical
motion.
Signature
A digital signature that is used in cryptography to identify one party to ensure authenticity.
SKLM (IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager)
IBM's EKM application that assists encrypting tape drives in generating, protecting, storing, and
maintaining encryption keys that encrypt information that is written to and decrypt information
that is read from tape media.
Slot blocker
A slot blocker is used to restrict/close off a data cell so a data cartridge cannot be inserted.
Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
A standard that is used by computer manufacturers for attaching peripheral devices (such as tape
drives, hard disks, CD-ROM players, printers, and scanners) to computers (servers). Pronounced
"scuzzy". Variations of the SCSI interface provide for faster data transmission rates than standard
serial and parallel ports (up to 320 megabytes per second). The variations include
v Fast/Wide SCSI - Uses a 16-bit bus, and supports data rates of up to 20 MBps.
v SCSI-1 - Uses an 8-bit bus, and supports data rates of 4 MBps.
v SCSI-2 - Same as SCSI-1, but uses a 50-pin connector instead of a 25-pin connector, and
supports multiple devices.
v Ultra-SCSI - Uses an 8- or 16-bit bus, and supports data rates of 20 or 40 MBps.
v Ultra2 SCSI - Uses an 8- or 16-bit bus and supports data rates of 40 or 80 MBps.
v Ultra3 SCSI - Uses a 16-bit bus and supports data rates of 80 or 160 MBps.
v Ultra160 SCSI - Uses a 16-bit bus and supports data rates of 80 or 160 MBps.
v Ultra320 SCSI - Uses a 16-bit bus and supports data rates of 320 MBps.
SMI-S See Storage Management Initiative Specification (SMI-S).
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. SMTP is a standard for email transmissions across the internet.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol. SNMP is used by network management systems to
monitor network-attached devices for conditions that warrant administrative attention.
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol. Used to synchronize the clocks of network-attached devices.
SMW Servo Manufacturer's Word.

220 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
SNS Sense.
Special feature
A feature that can be ordered to enhance the capability, storage capacity, or performance of a
product, but is not essential for its basic work.
SPI Security Parameters Index.
SR Service representative, see also CE.
SRAM
Static random access memory.
SS Status store.
SSH Secure Shell.
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)
A set of cryptographic protocols for secure communications on the Internet for such things as
web browsing, email, Internet faxing, instant messaging, and other data transfer. SSL allows
applications to communicate across a network in a way that is designed to prevent
eavesdropping, tampering, and message forgery.
SSP Serial SCSI Protocol.
ST Store.
Standard feature
The significant design elements of a product that are included as part of the fundamental
product.
START
Start maintenance.
StartTLS
Secure LDAP communication that uses TLS.
Storage Management Initiative Specification (SMI-S)
A storage standard that is developed and maintained by the Storage Networking Industry
Association (SNIA). It is also ratified as an ISO standard. The main objective of SMI-S is to enable
broad interoperable management of heterogeneous storage vendor systems.
Subsystem
A secondary or subordinate system, capable of operating independently of, or asynchronously
with, a controlling system.
Superuser
The Superuser role has access to most sections of the library menus. The default password is
sup001.
SUPP Support.
Sync Synchronous, synchronize. Occurring with a regular or predictable time relationship.

T
Tachometer, tach
A device that emits pulses that are used to measure/check speed or distance.
Tape cartridge
A container that holds magnetic tape that can be processed without separating it from the
container.
Tape void
An area in the tape in which no signal can be detected.

Glossary 221
TB Terabyte.
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.
TCU Tape control unit.
Terabyte
One terabyte = 1,000,000,000,000 bytes, or 1000 gigabytes (GBs).
TH Thermal.
TKLM (IBM Tivoli® Key Lifecycle Manager)
IBM's EKM application that assists encrypting tape drives in generating, protecting, storing, and
maintaining encryption keys that encrypt information that is written to and decrypt information
that is read from tape media.
thread/load operation
A procedure that places tape along the tape path.
TLS Transport :Layer Security.
TM Tapemark, Trademark.
Transport mode
End-to-end communications security in which the end-point computers do the security
processing.
Trusted certification
In cryptography, a trustworthy certificate that is not registered with a certificate authority.
Tunnel mode
Port-to-port communications security in which security is provided to several machines by a
single node.

U
UART Universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter.
UID Unit Identification.
UL Underwriter's Laboratories.
Universal rack connector
A rackmount kit has four universal rack connectors as part of the kit. Each connector has two
sides - one side is for round-hole racks, and the other side is for square-hole racks. The
square-hole side might be painted. The connectors are installed from the inside of the rack out,
and the rails are hooked onto them. See Figure 34 on page 44.
Unload
Prepare the tape cartridge for removal from the drive.
User The User role is an interchangeable term corresponding to the Monitor role. The User role has
viewing privileges to the unit, but is not able to make configuration changes.
Utilities
Utility programs.
Utility programs
A computer program in general support of the processes of a computer. For instance, a diagnostic
program.
UV Under voltage.

222 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
V
VOLSER
Volume serial number.
Volume
A certain portion of data, together with its data carrier, that can be handled conveniently as a
unit.
VPD Vital product data. The information that is contained within the tape drive that requires
nonvolatile storage that is used by functional areas of the drive, and information that is required
for manufacturing, RAS, and engineering.

W
Web UI, Web GUI, Web User Interface
Management GUI
Word A character string that is convenient for some purpose to consider as an entity.
Worldwide Node Name (WWNN)
A unique character string that identifies Fibre Channel Host Bus adapters (HBA).
WORM
Write Once, Read Many.
Write Write command.
WT World trade.
WWCID
Worldwide Cartridge Identifier.
WWN Worldwide Name.
WWNN
Worldwide Node Name.
WWPN
Worldwide port name.

X
XR External register.
XRA External register address register.

Glossary 223
224 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Index
A Cartridges (continued)
move 63
drive sled
description 7, 12
accessibility Cartridges, labeling 153 Drive sled 13
keyboard 195 Cartridges, repairing 171 Drive status 63
repeat rate of up and down Certificates Drive, logical addresses 15
buttons 195 backup 63 Drive, physical addresses 15
shortcut keys 195 create 63 Drives and Modules
accessor 11 restore 63 reset list 63
Accessor 109 checking components 40
Accessor, return to Base Module 132 Cleaning
accessory kit 40
acclimation xxi
tape drive 63
Cleaning drives 69
E
Adding components 109 element addresses 57
cold weather procedures xxi
Advanced configuration 56 Email Notification
Components 7
Advanced settings 63 configure 63
adding, removing, replacing 109
air vents, front panel 7 Encryption 18, 71
Configuration
Alerts and logging 20 enable or disable 63
Reset 63
Application managed encryption 18 KMIP 63
Restore 63
Auto Calibration 63 Library Managed Encryption 63
Save 63
Auto Clean 63 reset 63
Configuration file
Auto Clean, configure 69 Encryption Key Manager
Restore 63
Auto Clean, initial configuration 69 EKM 71
Save 63
Encryption license 71
Configuration, saving 113
enable 63
ConfigurationAdvanced 56
B configure host connection 58
Environmental specifications 25
Error codes 80
Back panel Configuring logical libraries 17
Error log 80
Drive 13 Connecting Fibre Channel cables 50
Ethernet Port 8
bar code labels 153 Connecting SAS cables 50
event codes 80
Bar code labels ConnectivityHost 21
Event information 73
guidelines for using 155 ConnectivityNetwork 22
Events 73
ordering 168 Control path failover 18
Expansion Module components 40
bar code reader 11 control path, drives 13
Expansion Module, installing 40
Base Module components 11, 25, 40 Control paths
Export drive logs 73
Base Module, installing 40 multiple 53
CPF 18
Customized features 56
C Customizing library features 53 F
Factory Reset 63
Cartridge 16, 149 Failed components, identifying 73, 132
capacity scaling 149, 151
cleaning 153 D features
optional
compatibility 150 Data path failover 18
drives 7, 12
data 149 Date and Time
Features, configuring 53
disposal of 166 configure 63
Feedback
leader pin 160 default settings 67
Comments
M8 151 description 1
sending vii
memory chip 153 Diagnostics
sending vii
ordering 166 Demo Mode 63
Fibre Channel cabling 50
proper handling 156 Drive test 63
Firmware
specifications 165 Library Verify 63
updating
Type M 151 Slot to Slot 63
using ITDT Tool 79
write-protect switch 155 display
firmware revision, verify 55
Cartridge Inventory SCD dot 106
front panel components 7
rescan 63 single-character 104
cartridge magazines 7, 109 DNS 22
Cartridge, acclimation 157 DPF 18
Cartridge, environment 157 Drive G
Cartridges 70 modify port settings 63 Gas and particulate exposure 25
accessing 70 Drive firmware glossary 205
eject 63 update 63
graphical view 63 Drive logs
list 63 export 63

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2017, 2018 225

H Library troubleshooting 73
Library Verify 63
N
hazards, possible xx Library-Managed Encryption Network connectivity 22
Host connectivity 21 configure 71 Network settings 63
host interface connectors 8 library, table top installation 47, 52
HTTP 22 library, verify host connection 58
License Key management 63 O
List of Drives and Modules Operation problems 73
I reset 63 Operations
I/O station 7 Load balancing 18 Management GUI 59
I/O Station location requirements 25 Operator Panel
enable and disable 63 Log files control keys on front panel 7
open 63 download 63 display 7
Identifier Light logical libraries 57 managing 62
on and off 63 Logical libraries session lock timeout 63
identify cables 40 multiple 53 Operator Panel menu items 62
identify library components 40 Logical Libraries Optional features 34
Identifying failed components 73, 109, graphical view 63 Ordering Media
132 Manage (Basic mode) 63 Ordering WORM cartridges 152
Initial Setup 63 Manage (Expert mode) 63 Overview 1
installation Logical libraries, configuration 17
rack Logical library modes 17
safety xxi
installation, verify 55
LTO Tape Drives 7, 12
LTO Type M data cartridge 151
P
packaging materials 36
interfaces, supported 7
partitioning 57
internal view of library 109
Password Policy 63
Inventory List 63 M Path Failover license
IPv4/IPv6 22 M8 data cartridge 151 enable 63
ITDT Tool 79 Magazine, unlocking 138 Physical specifications 25
magazines 7, 109 power button 7
Magazines 9 power connector 8
K open 63 Power cords 28
Key Management Interoperability Magazines lock Power specifications 25
Protocol 71 enable or disable 63 power supply 109
Key Path Diagnostics 63, 71 Main screen, Management GUI 59 Power supply 11
keyboard 195 Main screen, Operator Panel 62 power supply LEDs 8
KMIP 71 Management function Pre-call checklist 77
KMIP encryption 18 locating 63
KMIP wizard 71 Management Graphical User
Interface 59
Management GUI
R
rack installation 43, 47
L operating 59
Management GUI menu items 59 safety xxi
Labels Managing rack mounting the library 43, 47
bar code 153 Operator Panel 62 Random mode 17
guidelines for using 155 Manually unlock magazines 138 Read/Write capability 150
ordering 168 media 16 Rear panel 8
laser Media 149 rear panel of library 8
compliance xx media capacity 1 regulatory information v
safety xx menu shortcuts 63 Regulatory specifications 25
LCD Adjustment 63 Methods Remote Authentication (LDAP)
LDAP 22 cleaning drives 69 configure 63
LEDs, front panel 7 MIB 99 Remote Logging (rsyslog)
Library MIBs 20 configure 63
adding, removing, replacing Minimum firmware levels Removing components 109
components 109 Library Managed Encryption v Replacing components 109
Tools needed 109 LTO M8 v Reset
library configuration forms 143 LTO6 v drive 63
Library Controller Board 109 LTO7 v library 63
Library firmware LTO8 v rediscover devices 63
update 63 Path Failover v RID tag 113
Library information 63 Mixed drives 12, 13 robotic lock lever 109
library layout 25 module components 109 Robotic spooling cable 134
Library logs Modules, adding 113 rsyslog 20
view or clear 63 Modules, replacing 113
Library sharing 18 Multipath architecture 53
Library tests, running 73

226 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
S U
safety information Universal rack connectors 43
laser compliance xx Unlabeled Media
laser safety xx allow 63
possible hazards xx Unlock magazines with Management
SAS cabling 50 GUI 138
Saving the configuration 113 Unlock magazines with Operator
SCSI address Panel 138
Drive 15 unpacking the library 36
Security 25 Updating firmware
sending your comments v, vii using ITDT Tool 79
Sense data USB cabling 50
using 104 USB port 8
Sequential mode 17 Users
Sequential Mode, configure 63 Access Recovery 63
Sequential Mode, status 63 Add 63
Serial Port 8 Modify Operator Panel PIN 63
Session Timeout 63 Modify Role Permissions 63
shipping container 36 Modify User Passwords 63
shortcut keys 195 Remove 63
SKLM 71
SKLM (Security Key Lifecycle
Manager) 18
sled, description of tape drive 7, 12
V
validate, tape drive installation 50
SMTP 22
SNMP 22, 99
configure 63
SNMP Audit Logging 20 W
SNMP support 20 WORM 152
SNTP WORM (Write Once, Read Many) 152
configure 63 WORM requirements 152
specifications 67 Write Once, Read Many (see
Specifications WORM) 152
cartridges 165 Write-Protect switch
Spooling mechanism 134 setting 155
removing 134 WWNN
replacing 134 Worldwide node name 57
SSL 22 WWPN
enable or disable 63 Worldwide port name 57
Status light 106
support notification v

T
table top installation 47, 52
tape cartridge 16
tape cartridges, labeling 54
tape cartridges, loading 54
tape drive 109
tape drive sled 8
Tape drives
description 12
quantity in library 7, 12
tape drives, install 50
TapeAlert Flags
for drives 100
TapeAlert Flags, library 99
TapeAlert support 20
technical support v, 78
Technical Support
accessing online vi
Time Zone
set 63
trademarks 199
troubleshooting 73
Troubleshooting, library 73

Index 227
228 IBM TS4300 Tape Library Machine Type 3555: User's Guide
Readers’ Comments — We'd Like to Hear from You
IBM TS4300 Tape Library
Machine Type 3555
User's Guide

Publication No. SC27-4629-03

We appreciate your comments about this publication. Please comment on specific errors or omissions, accuracy,
organization, subject matter, or completeness of this book. The comments you send should pertain to only the
information in this manual or product and the way in which the information is presented.

For technical questions and information about products and prices, please contact your IBM branch office, your
IBM business partner, or your authorized remarketer.

When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. IBM or any other organizations will only use
the personal information that you supply to contact you about the issues that you state on this form.

Comments:

Thank you for your support.

Send your comments to the address on the reverse side of this form.
If you would like a response from IBM, please fill in the following information:

Name Address

Company or Organization

Phone No. Email address

 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________
Readers’ Comments — We'd Like to Hear from You Cut or Fold
SC27-4629-03 IBM® Along Line

_ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ _Tape
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Please
_ _ _ _ _do
_ _not
_ _ staple
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ Tape
______

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

IBM Corporation
Building 9032-2 Department GZW
Information Development
9000 South Rita Road
Tucson, AZ
USA 85744-0002

_________________________________________________________________________________________
Fold and Tape Please do not staple Fold and Tape

Cut or Fold
SC27-4629-03 Along Line
IBM®

Printed in USA

SC27-4629-03